1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2026 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <linux/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF: The min chandef changed 217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider 218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed 219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap 220 * was changed. 221 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA: NPCA configuration changed 222 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA_PUNCT: NPCA puncturing changed 223 */ 224 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF = BIT(4), 230 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5), 231 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6), 232 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA = BIT(7), 233 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_NPCA_PUNCT = BIT(8), 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request" 238 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation 239 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any 240 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL) 241 * @require_npca: If NPCA is configured, require it to 242 * remain, this is used by AP interfaces 243 */ 244 struct ieee80211_chan_req { 245 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper; 246 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 247 bool require_npca; 248 }; 249 250 /** 251 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 252 * 253 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 254 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 255 * 256 * @def: the channel definition 257 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 258 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as, 259 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA 260 * @radio_idx: index of the wiphy radio used used for this channel 261 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 262 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 263 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 264 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 265 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 266 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 267 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 268 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 269 */ 270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 271 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 272 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 273 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 274 275 int radio_idx; 276 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 277 278 bool radar_enabled; 279 280 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 281 }; 282 283 /** 284 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 285 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 286 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 287 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 288 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 289 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 290 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 291 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 292 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 293 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 294 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 295 * for changes/removal.) 296 */ 297 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 298 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 299 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 300 }; 301 302 /** 303 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 304 * 305 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 306 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 307 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 308 * done. 309 * 310 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 311 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 312 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 313 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 314 */ 315 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 316 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 317 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 318 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 319 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 320 }; 321 322 /** 323 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 324 * 325 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 326 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 327 * 328 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 329 * also implies a change in the AID. 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 332 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 337 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 339 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 341 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 342 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 345 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 346 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 347 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 348 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 349 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 350 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 351 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 352 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 353 * changed 354 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 355 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 356 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 357 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 358 * context had been assigned. 359 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 360 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 361 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 362 * keep alive) changed. 363 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 364 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 365 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 366 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 367 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 368 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 369 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 370 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 371 * status changed. 372 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 373 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: negotiated TID to link mapping was changed 374 * @BSS_CHANGED_TPE: transmit power envelope changed 375 * @BSS_CHANGED_NAN_LOCAL_SCHED: NAN local schedule changed (NAN mode only) 376 * @BSS_CHANGED_NPCA: NPCA parameters changed 377 */ 378 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 379 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 380 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 381 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 382 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 383 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 384 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 385 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 386 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 387 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 388 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 389 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 390 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 391 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 392 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 393 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 394 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 395 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 396 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 397 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 398 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 399 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 400 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 401 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 402 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 403 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 404 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 405 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 406 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 407 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 408 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 409 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 410 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = BIT_ULL(31), 411 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 412 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34), 413 BSS_CHANGED_TPE = BIT_ULL(35), 414 BSS_CHANGED_NAN_LOCAL_SCHED = BIT_ULL(36), 415 BSS_CHANGED_NPCA = BIT_ULL(37), 416 417 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 418 }; 419 420 /* 421 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 422 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 423 * filtering will be disabled. 424 */ 425 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 426 427 /** 428 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 429 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 430 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 431 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 432 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 433 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 434 * once each time the timeout triggers. 435 */ 436 enum ieee80211_event_type { 437 RSSI_EVENT, 438 MLME_EVENT, 439 BAR_RX_EVENT, 440 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 441 }; 442 443 /** 444 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 445 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 446 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 447 */ 448 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 449 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 450 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 451 }; 452 453 /** 454 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 455 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 456 */ 457 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 458 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 459 }; 460 461 /** 462 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 463 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 464 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 465 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 466 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 467 */ 468 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 469 AUTH_EVENT, 470 ASSOC_EVENT, 471 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 472 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 473 }; 474 475 /** 476 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 477 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 478 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 479 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 480 */ 481 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 482 MLME_SUCCESS, 483 MLME_DENIED, 484 MLME_TIMEOUT, 485 }; 486 487 /** 488 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 489 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 490 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 491 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 492 */ 493 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 494 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 495 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 496 u16 reason; 497 }; 498 499 /** 500 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 501 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 502 * @tid: the tid 503 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 504 */ 505 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 506 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 507 u16 tid; 508 u16 ssn; 509 }; 510 511 /** 512 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 513 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 514 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 515 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 516 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 517 * @u:union holding the fields above 518 */ 519 struct ieee80211_event { 520 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 521 union { 522 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 523 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 524 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 525 } u; 526 }; 527 528 /** 529 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 530 * 531 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 532 * 533 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 534 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 535 */ 536 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 537 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 538 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 539 }; 540 541 /** 542 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 543 * 544 * @lci: LCI subelement content 545 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 546 * @lci_len: LCI data length 547 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 548 */ 549 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 550 const u8 *lci; 551 const u8 *civicloc; 552 size_t lci_len; 553 size_t civicloc_len; 554 }; 555 556 /** 557 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 558 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 559 * 560 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 561 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 562 */ 563 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 564 u32 min_interval; 565 u32 max_interval; 566 }; 567 568 #define IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ 5 569 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp { 570 bool valid; 571 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 572 u8 count; 573 }; 574 575 #define IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ 16 576 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd { 577 bool valid; 578 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 579 u8 count, n; 580 }; 581 582 /** 583 * struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe - parsed transmit power envelope information 584 * @max_local: maximum local EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz each 585 * (indexed by TX power category) 586 * @max_reg_client: maximum regulatory client EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 587 * 160, 320 MHz each 588 * (indexed by TX power category) 589 * @psd_local: maximum local power spectral density, one value for each 20 MHz 590 * subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 591 * (indexed by TX power category) 592 * @psd_reg_client: maximum regulatory power spectral density, one value for 593 * each 20 MHz subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 594 * (indexed by TX power category) 595 */ 596 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe { 597 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp max_local[2], max_reg_client[2]; 598 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd psd_local[2], psd_reg_client[2]; 599 }; 600 601 /** 602 * struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params - NPCA parameters 603 * @min_dur_thresh: NPCA minimum duration threshold (512 + 128*n usec) 604 * @switch_delay: NPCA switch delay (units of 4 usec) 605 * @switch_back_delay: NPCA switch back delay (units of 4 usec) 606 * @init_qsrc: initial QSRC value 607 * @moplen: indicates MOPLEN NPCA is permitted in the BSS 608 * @enabled: NPCA is enabled for this link 609 * 610 * Note: the individual values (except @enabled) are in spec representation. 611 */ 612 struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params { 613 u32 min_dur_thresh:4, 614 switch_delay:6, 615 switch_back_delay:6, 616 init_qsrc:2, 617 moplen:1, 618 enabled:1; 619 }; 620 621 /** 622 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 623 * 624 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 625 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 626 * 627 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 628 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only 629 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not 630 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe 631 * responses. 632 * @addr: (link) address used locally 633 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 634 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 635 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 636 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 637 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 638 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 639 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 640 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 641 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 642 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 643 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 644 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 645 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 646 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 647 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 648 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 649 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 650 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 651 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 652 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 653 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 654 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 655 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 656 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 657 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 658 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 659 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 660 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 661 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 662 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 663 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 664 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 665 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 666 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 667 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 668 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 669 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 670 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 671 * the current band. 672 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 673 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 674 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 675 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 676 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be 677 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 678 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 679 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 680 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 681 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 682 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 683 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 684 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 685 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 686 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 687 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 688 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 689 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 690 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 691 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 692 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 693 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 694 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 695 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 696 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 697 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 698 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 699 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 700 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 701 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 702 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 703 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 704 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 705 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 706 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 707 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 708 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 709 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 710 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 711 * station. 712 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 713 * responder functionality. 714 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 715 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 716 * @tx_bss_conf: Pointer to the BSS configuration of transmitting interface 717 * if MBSSID is enabled. This pointer is RCU-protected due to CSA finish 718 * and BSS color change flows accessing it. 719 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 720 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 721 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 722 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 723 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 724 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 725 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 726 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 727 * connected to (STA) 728 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 729 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 730 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 731 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 732 * interval. 733 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 734 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 735 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 736 * @tpe: transmit power envelope information 737 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 738 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 739 * @epcs_support: does this BSS support EPCS 740 * @uhr_support: does this BSS support UHR 741 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 742 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 743 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 744 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 745 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 746 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 747 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 748 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 749 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 750 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 751 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 752 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 753 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 754 * beamformer 755 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 756 * beamformee 757 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 758 * beamformer 759 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 760 * beamformee 761 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 762 * beamformer 763 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 764 * beamformee 765 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 766 * beamformer 767 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 768 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 769 * bandwidth 770 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 771 * beamformer 772 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 773 * beamformee 774 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 775 * beamformer 776 * @eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo: in AP-mode, does this BSS support the 777 * reception of an EHT TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 778 * bandwidth 779 * @eht_disable_mcs15: disable EHT-MCS 15 reception capability. 780 * @bss_param_ch_cnt: in BSS-mode, the BSS params change count. This 781 * information is the latest known value. It can come from this link's 782 * beacon or from a beacon sent by another link. 783 * @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: in BSS-mode, the link_id to which the beacon 784 * that updated &bss_param_ch_cnt belongs. E.g. if link 1 doesn't hear 785 * its beacons, and link 2 sent a beacon with an RNR element that updated 786 * link 1's BSS params change count, then, link 1's 787 * bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will be 2. That means that link 1 knows that 788 * link 2 was the link that updated its bss_param_ch_cnt value. 789 * In case link 1 hears its beacon again, bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will 790 * be updated to 1, even if bss_param_ch_cnt didn't change. This allows 791 * the link to know that it heard the latest value from its own beacon 792 * (as opposed to hearing its value from another link's beacon). 793 * @enh_bss_param_ch_cnt: In BSS-mode, the enhanced BSS parameters change 794 * counter. See @bss_param_ch_cnt, it works the same way. 795 * @enh_bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: In BSS-mode, the link_id for the enhanced 796 * BSS parameter change counter, see @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id. 797 * @s1g_long_beacon_period: number of beacon intervals between each long 798 * beacon transmission. 799 * @npca: NPCA parameters 800 */ 801 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 802 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 803 struct cfg80211_bss *bss; 804 805 const u8 *bssid; 806 unsigned int link_id; 807 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 808 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 809 bool uora_exists; 810 u8 uora_ocw_range; 811 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 812 bool he_support; 813 bool twt_requester; 814 bool twt_responder; 815 bool twt_protected; 816 bool twt_broadcast; 817 /* erp related data */ 818 bool use_cts_prot; 819 bool use_short_preamble; 820 bool use_short_slot; 821 bool enable_beacon; 822 u8 dtim_period; 823 u16 beacon_int; 824 u16 assoc_capability; 825 u64 sync_tsf; 826 u32 sync_device_ts; 827 u8 sync_dtim_count; 828 u32 basic_rates; 829 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 830 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 831 u16 ht_operation_mode; 832 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 833 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 834 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 835 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 836 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 837 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 838 bool qos; 839 bool hidden_ssid; 840 int txpower; 841 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 842 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 843 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 844 u16 max_idle_period; 845 bool protected_keep_alive; 846 bool ftm_responder; 847 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 848 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 849 bool nontransmitted; 850 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *tx_bss_conf; 851 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 852 u8 bssid_index; 853 u8 bssid_indicator; 854 bool ema_ap; 855 u8 profile_periodicity; 856 struct { 857 u32 params; 858 u16 nss_set; 859 } he_oper; 860 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 861 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 862 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 863 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 864 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 865 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 866 867 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe tpe; 868 869 u8 pwr_reduction; 870 bool eht_support; 871 bool epcs_support; 872 bool uhr_support; 873 874 bool csa_active; 875 876 bool mu_mimo_owner; 877 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 878 879 bool color_change_active; 880 u8 color_change_color; 881 882 bool ht_ldpc; 883 bool vht_ldpc; 884 bool he_ldpc; 885 bool vht_su_beamformer; 886 bool vht_su_beamformee; 887 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 888 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 889 bool he_su_beamformer; 890 bool he_su_beamformee; 891 bool he_mu_beamformer; 892 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 893 bool eht_su_beamformer; 894 bool eht_su_beamformee; 895 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 896 bool eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo; 897 bool eht_disable_mcs15; 898 899 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt; 900 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 901 u8 enh_bss_param_ch_cnt; 902 u8 enh_bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 903 904 u8 s1g_long_beacon_period; 905 906 struct ieee80211_bss_npca_params npca; 907 }; 908 909 #define IEEE80211_NAN_MAX_CHANNELS 3 910 911 /** 912 * struct ieee80211_nan_channel - NAN channel information 913 * 914 * @chanreq: channel request for this NAN channel. Even though this chanreq::ap 915 * is irrelevant for NAN, still store it for convenience - some functions 916 * require it as an argument. 917 * @needed_rx_chains: number of RX chains needed for this NAN channel 918 * @chanctx_conf: chanctx_conf assigned to this NAN channel. 919 * If a local channel is being ULWed (because we needed this chanctx for 920 * something else), the local NAN channel that used this chanctx, 921 * will have this pointer set to %NULL. 922 * A peer NAN channel should never have this pointer set to %NULL. 923 * @channel_entry: the Channel Entry blob as defined in Wi-Fi Aware 924 * (TM) 4.0 specification Table 100 (Channel Entry format for the NAN 925 * Availability attribute). 926 */ 927 struct ieee80211_nan_channel { 928 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 929 u8 needed_rx_chains; 930 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf; 931 u8 channel_entry[6]; 932 }; 933 934 /** 935 * struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map - NAN peer schedule map 936 * 937 * This stores a single map from a peer's schedule. Each peer can have 938 * multiple maps. 939 * 940 * @map_id: the map ID from the peer schedule, %CFG80211_NAN_INVALID_MAP_ID 941 * if unused 942 * @slots: mapping of time slots to channel configurations in the schedule's 943 * channels array 944 */ 945 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map { 946 u8 map_id; 947 struct ieee80211_nan_channel *slots[CFG80211_NAN_SCHED_NUM_TIME_SLOTS]; 948 }; 949 950 /** 951 * struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched - NAN peer schedule 952 * 953 * This stores the complete schedule from a peer. Contains peer-level 954 * parameters and an array of schedule maps. 955 * 956 * @seq_id: the sequence ID from the peer schedule 957 * @committed_dw: committed DW as published by the peer 958 * @max_chan_switch: maximum channel switch time in microseconds 959 * @init_ulw: initial ULWs as published by the peer (copied) 960 * @ulw_size: number of bytes in @init_ulw 961 * @maps: array of peer schedule maps. Invalid slots have map_id set to 962 * %CFG80211_NAN_INVALID_MAP_ID. 963 * @n_channels: number of valid channel entries in @channels 964 * @channels: flexible array of negotiated peer channels for this schedule 965 */ 966 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched { 967 u8 seq_id; 968 u16 committed_dw; 969 u16 max_chan_switch; 970 const u8 *init_ulw; 971 u16 ulw_size; 972 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_map maps[CFG80211_NAN_MAX_PEER_MAPS]; 973 u8 n_channels; 974 struct ieee80211_nan_channel channels[] __counted_by(n_channels); 975 }; 976 977 /** 978 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 979 * 980 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 981 * 982 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 983 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 984 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 985 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 986 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 987 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 988 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 989 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 990 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 991 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 992 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 993 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 994 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 995 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 996 * station 997 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 998 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 999 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 1000 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 1002 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 1003 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 1004 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 1005 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 1006 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 1007 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 1008 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 1009 * hardware queue. 1010 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 1011 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 1012 * is for the whole aggregation. 1013 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 1014 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 1015 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 1016 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 1017 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 1018 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 1019 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 1020 * off-channel operation. 1021 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 1022 * (header conversion) 1023 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 1024 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 1025 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 1026 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 1027 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 1028 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 1029 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 1030 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 1031 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 1032 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 1033 * queue gets full. 1034 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 1035 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 1036 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 1037 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 1038 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 1039 * should kick the MLME state machine. 1040 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 1041 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 1042 * status to user space) 1043 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 1044 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 1045 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 1046 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 1047 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 1048 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 1049 * handled properly by the device. 1050 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 1051 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 1052 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 1053 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 1054 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 1055 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 1056 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 1057 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 1058 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 1059 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 1060 * PS-Poll responses. 1061 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 1062 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 1063 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 1064 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 1065 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 1066 * monitor injection). 1067 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 1068 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 1069 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 1070 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 1071 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 1072 * 1073 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 1074 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 1075 */ 1076 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 1077 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 1078 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 1079 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 1080 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 1081 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 1082 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 1083 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 1084 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 1085 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 1086 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 1087 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 1088 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 1089 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 1090 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 1091 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 1092 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 1093 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 1094 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 1095 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 1096 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 1097 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 1098 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 1099 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 1100 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 1101 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 1102 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 1103 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 1104 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 1105 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 1106 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 1107 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 1108 }; 1109 1110 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 1111 1112 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 1113 1114 /** 1115 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 1116 * 1117 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 1118 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 1119 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 1120 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 1121 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 1122 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 1123 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 1124 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 1125 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 1126 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 1127 * it can be sent out. 1128 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 1129 * has already been assigned to this frame. 1130 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 1131 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 1132 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 1133 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 1134 * for sequence number assignment 1135 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame 1136 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal 1137 * operation on the interface. 1138 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 1139 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 1140 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 1141 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 1142 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 1143 * it's intended for an MLD. 1144 * 1145 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 1146 */ 1147 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 1148 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 1149 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 1150 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 1151 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 1152 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 1153 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 1154 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 1155 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 1156 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 1157 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 1158 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10), 1159 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 1160 }; 1161 1162 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 1163 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 1164 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 1165 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 1166 1167 /** 1168 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 1169 * 1170 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 1171 * 1172 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 1173 */ 1174 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 1175 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 1176 }; 1177 1178 /* 1179 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 1180 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 1181 */ 1182 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 1183 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 1184 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 1185 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 1186 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 1187 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 1188 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 1189 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 1190 1191 /** 1192 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 1193 * Rate Control algorithm. 1194 * 1195 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 1196 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 1197 * 1198 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 1199 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1200 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1201 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1202 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1203 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1204 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1205 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1206 * Greenfield mode. 1207 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1208 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1209 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1210 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1211 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1212 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1213 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1214 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1215 */ 1216 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1217 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1218 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1219 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1220 1221 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1222 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1223 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1224 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1225 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1226 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1227 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1228 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1229 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1230 }; 1231 1232 1233 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1234 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1235 1236 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1237 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1238 1239 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1240 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1241 1242 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1243 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1244 1245 /** 1246 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1247 * 1248 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1249 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1250 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1251 * 1252 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1253 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1254 * 1255 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1256 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1257 * 1258 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1259 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1260 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1261 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1262 * information:: 1263 * 1264 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1265 * 1266 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1267 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1268 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1269 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1270 * information should then contain:: 1271 * 1272 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1273 * 1274 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1275 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1276 */ 1277 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1278 s8 idx; 1279 u16 count:5, 1280 flags:11; 1281 } __packed; 1282 1283 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1284 1285 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1286 { 1287 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1288 } 1289 1290 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1291 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1292 { 1293 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1294 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1295 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1296 } 1297 1298 static inline u8 1299 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1300 { 1301 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1302 } 1303 1304 static inline u8 1305 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1306 { 1307 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1308 } 1309 1310 /** 1311 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1312 * 1313 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1314 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1315 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1316 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1317 * 1318 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1319 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1320 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1321 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1322 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1323 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1324 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1325 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1326 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1327 * @control: union part for control data 1328 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1329 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1330 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1331 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1332 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1333 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1334 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1335 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1336 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1337 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1338 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1339 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1340 * @pad: padding 1341 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1342 * @status: union part for status data 1343 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1344 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1345 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1346 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1347 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1348 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1349 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1350 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1351 * @status.link_valid: if the link which is identified by @status.link_id is 1352 * valid. This flag is set by the driver in the TX status callback when the 1353 * connection is MLO and the driver knows which link was used for TX. 1354 * @status.link_id: id of the link used to transmit the packet. This is used 1355 * along with @status.link_valid. 1356 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1357 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1358 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1359 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1360 */ 1361 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1362 /* common information */ 1363 u32 flags; 1364 u32 band:3, 1365 status_data_idr:1, 1366 status_data:13, 1367 hw_queue:4, 1368 tx_time_est:10; 1369 /* 1 free bit */ 1370 1371 union { 1372 struct { 1373 union { 1374 /* rate control */ 1375 struct { 1376 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1377 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1378 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1379 u8 use_rts:1; 1380 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1381 u8 short_preamble:1; 1382 u8 skip_table:1; 1383 1384 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1385 u8 antennas:2; 1386 1387 /* 14 bits free */ 1388 }; 1389 /* only needed before rate control */ 1390 unsigned long jiffies; 1391 }; 1392 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1393 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1394 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1395 u32 flags; 1396 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1397 } control; 1398 struct { 1399 u64 cookie; 1400 } ack; 1401 struct { 1402 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1403 s32 ack_signal; 1404 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1405 u8 ampdu_len; 1406 u8 antenna; 1407 u8 pad; 1408 u16 tx_time; 1409 u8 flags; 1410 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1411 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1412 } status; 1413 struct { 1414 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1415 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1416 u8 pad[4]; 1417 1418 void *rate_driver_data[ 1419 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1420 }; 1421 void *driver_data[ 1422 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1423 }; 1424 }; 1425 1426 static inline u16 1427 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1428 { 1429 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1430 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1431 */ 1432 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1433 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1434 } 1435 1436 static inline u16 1437 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1438 { 1439 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1440 } 1441 1442 /*** 1443 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1444 * 1445 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1446 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1447 * 1448 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1449 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1450 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1451 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1452 * that was used when sending the packet. 1453 */ 1454 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1455 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1456 u8 try_count; 1457 u8 tx_power_idx; 1458 }; 1459 1460 /** 1461 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1462 * 1463 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1464 * @info: Basic tx status information 1465 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1466 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1467 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1468 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1469 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1470 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1471 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1472 */ 1473 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1474 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1475 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1476 struct sk_buff *skb; 1477 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1478 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1479 u8 n_rates; 1480 1481 struct list_head *free_list; 1482 }; 1483 1484 /** 1485 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1486 * 1487 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1488 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1489 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1490 * 1491 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1492 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1493 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1494 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1495 */ 1496 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1497 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1498 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1499 const u8 *common_ies; 1500 size_t common_ie_len; 1501 }; 1502 1503 1504 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1505 { 1506 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1507 } 1508 1509 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1510 { 1511 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1512 } 1513 1514 /** 1515 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1516 * 1517 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1518 * 1519 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1520 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1521 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1522 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1523 * 1524 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1525 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1526 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1527 */ 1528 static inline void 1529 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1530 { 1531 int i; 1532 1533 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1534 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1535 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1536 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1537 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1538 /* clear the rate counts */ 1539 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1540 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1541 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1542 } 1543 1544 1545 /** 1546 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1547 * 1548 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1549 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1550 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1551 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1552 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1553 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1554 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1555 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1556 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1557 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1558 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1559 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1560 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1561 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1562 * de-duplication by itself. 1563 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1564 * the frame. 1565 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1566 * the frame. 1567 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1568 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position 1569 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value. 1570 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1571 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1572 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1573 * merging. 1574 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1575 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1576 * (including FCS) was received. 1577 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1578 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1579 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime 1580 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid 1581 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see 1582 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is 1583 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32. 1584 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1585 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1586 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1587 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1588 * each A-MPDU 1589 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1590 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1591 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1592 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1593 * on this subframe 1594 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1595 * done by the hardware 1596 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1597 * processing it in any regular way. 1598 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1599 * them for sniffing purposes. 1600 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1601 * monitor interfaces. 1602 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1603 * them for sniffing purposes. 1604 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1605 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1606 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1607 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1608 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1609 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1610 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1611 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1612 * interleaved with other frames. 1613 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1614 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1615 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1616 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1617 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1618 * in the skb. 1619 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1620 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1621 * the first subframe. 1622 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1623 * be done in the hardware. 1624 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1625 * frame 1626 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1627 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1628 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1629 * 1630 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1631 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1632 * - DATA3_CODING 1633 * - DATA5_GI 1634 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1635 * - DATA6_NSTS 1636 * - DATA3_STBC 1637 * 1638 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1639 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1640 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1641 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1642 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1643 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1644 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1645 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1646 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1647 * hardware or driver) 1648 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VHT: VHT radiotap data is present 1649 */ 1650 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1651 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1652 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1653 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2), 1654 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1655 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1656 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1657 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1658 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7), 1659 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1660 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1661 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1662 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1663 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1664 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1665 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1666 /* one free bit at 15 */ 1667 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17), 1668 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16, 1669 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16, 1670 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16, 1671 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1672 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1673 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1674 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1675 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1676 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1677 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1678 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1679 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1680 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1681 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1682 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1683 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1684 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VHT = BIT(31), 1685 }; 1686 1687 /** 1688 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1689 * 1690 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1691 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1692 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1693 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1694 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1695 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1696 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1697 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1698 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1699 */ 1700 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1701 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1702 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1703 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1704 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1705 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1706 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1707 }; 1708 1709 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1710 1711 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1712 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1713 RX_ENC_HT, 1714 RX_ENC_VHT, 1715 RX_ENC_HE, 1716 RX_ENC_EHT, 1717 RX_ENC_UHR, 1718 RX_ENC_S1G, 1719 }; 1720 1721 /** 1722 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1723 * 1724 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1725 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1726 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1727 * 1728 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1729 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1730 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1731 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1732 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1733 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1734 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1735 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1736 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1737 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1738 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1739 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1740 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1741 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1742 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1743 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1744 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1745 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1746 * values were filled. 1747 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1748 * support dB or unspecified units) 1749 * @antenna: antenna used 1750 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1751 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1752 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE, EHT and UHR only) 1753 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1754 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1755 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1756 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1757 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1758 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1759 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1760 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1761 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1762 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1763 * @uhr: UHR specific rate information 1764 * @uhr.ru: UHR RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1765 * @uhr.gi: UHR GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1766 * @uhr.elr: UHR ELR MCS was used 1767 * @uhr.im: UHR interference mitigation was used 1768 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1769 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1770 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1771 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1772 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1773 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1774 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1775 * @link_valid. 1776 */ 1777 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1778 u64 mactime; 1779 union { 1780 u64 boottime_ns; 1781 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1782 }; 1783 u32 device_timestamp; 1784 u32 ampdu_reference; 1785 u32 flag; 1786 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1787 u8 enc_flags; 1788 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1789 union { 1790 struct { 1791 u8 he_ru:3; 1792 u8 he_gi:2; 1793 u8 he_dcm:1; 1794 } __packed; 1795 struct { 1796 u8 ru:4; 1797 u8 gi:2; 1798 } __packed eht; 1799 struct { 1800 u8 ru:4; 1801 u8 gi:2; 1802 u8 elr:1; 1803 u8 im:1; 1804 } __packed uhr; 1805 } __packed; 1806 u8 rate_idx; 1807 u8 nss; 1808 u8 rx_flags; 1809 u8 band; 1810 u8 antenna; 1811 s8 signal; 1812 u8 chains; 1813 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1814 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1815 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1816 }; 1817 1818 static_assert(sizeof(struct ieee80211_rx_status) <= sizeof_field(struct sk_buff, cb)); 1819 1820 static inline u32 1821 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1822 { 1823 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1824 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1825 } 1826 1827 /** 1828 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1829 * 1830 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1831 * 1832 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1833 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1834 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1835 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1836 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1837 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1838 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1839 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1840 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1841 * for more. 1842 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1843 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1844 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1845 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1846 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1847 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1848 * operating channel. 1849 */ 1850 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1851 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1852 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1853 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1854 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1855 }; 1856 1857 1858 /** 1859 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1860 * 1861 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1862 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1863 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1864 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1865 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1866 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1867 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1868 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1869 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1870 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1871 */ 1872 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1873 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1874 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1875 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1876 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1877 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1878 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1879 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1880 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1881 }; 1882 1883 /** 1884 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1885 * 1886 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1887 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1888 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1889 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1890 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1891 */ 1892 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1893 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1894 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1895 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1896 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1897 1898 /* keep last */ 1899 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1900 }; 1901 1902 /** 1903 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1904 * 1905 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1906 * 1907 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1908 * 1909 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1910 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1911 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1912 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1913 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1914 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1915 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1916 * 1917 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1918 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1919 * 1920 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1921 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1922 * 1923 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1924 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1925 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1926 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1927 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1928 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1929 * 1930 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1931 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1932 * configured for an HT channel. 1933 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1934 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1935 */ 1936 struct ieee80211_conf { 1937 u32 flags; 1938 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1939 1940 u16 listen_interval; 1941 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1942 1943 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1944 1945 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1946 bool radar_enabled; 1947 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1948 }; 1949 1950 /** 1951 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1952 * 1953 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1954 * operation. 1955 * 1956 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1957 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1958 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1959 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1960 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1961 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1962 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1963 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1964 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1965 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1966 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1967 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1968 * channel, expressed in TU. 1969 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO 1970 */ 1971 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1972 u64 timestamp; 1973 u32 device_timestamp; 1974 bool block_tx; 1975 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1976 u8 count; 1977 u8 link_id; 1978 u32 delay; 1979 }; 1980 1981 /** 1982 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1983 * 1984 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1985 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1986 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1987 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1988 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1989 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1990 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1991 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1992 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1993 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1994 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1995 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1996 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1997 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1998 * enabled for the interface. 1999 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA 2000 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without 2001 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to 2002 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis. 2003 * @IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC: indicates that the AP sta should 2004 * be removed only after setting the vif as unassociated, and not the 2005 * opposite. Only relevant for STA vifs. 2006 */ 2007 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 2008 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 2009 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 2010 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 2011 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 2012 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 2013 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5), 2014 IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC = BIT(6), 2015 }; 2016 2017 2018 /** 2019 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 2020 * 2021 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 2022 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 2023 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 2024 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 2025 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 2026 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 2027 * mac80211. 2028 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_MCAST: tx multicast encapsulation offload is enabled 2029 * The driver supports sending multicast frames passed as 802.3 frames 2030 * by mac80211. 2031 */ 2032 2033 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 2034 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 2035 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 2036 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 2037 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_MCAST = BIT(3), 2038 }; 2039 2040 #define IEEE80211_NAN_AVAIL_BLOB_MAX_LEN 54 2041 2042 /** 2043 * struct ieee80211_eml_params - EHT Operating mode notification parameters 2044 * 2045 * EML Operating mode notification parameters received in the Operating mode 2046 * notification frame. This struct is used as a container to pass the info to 2047 * the underlay driver. 2048 * 2049 * @link_id: the link ID where the Operating mode notification frame has been 2050 * received. 2051 * @control: EML control field defined in P802.11be section 9.4.1.76. 2052 * @link_bitmap: eMLSR/eMLMR enabled links defined in P802.11be 2053 * section 9.4.1.76. 2054 * @emlmr_mcs_map_count: eMLMR number of valid mcs_map_bw fields according to 2055 * P802.11be section 9.4.1.76 (valid if eMLMR mode control bit is set). 2056 * @emlmr_mcs_map_bw: eMLMR supported MCS and NSS set subfileds defined in 2057 * P802.11be section 9.4.1.76 (valid if eMLMR mode control bit is set). 2058 */ 2059 struct ieee80211_eml_params { 2060 u8 link_id; 2061 u8 control; 2062 u16 link_bitmap; 2063 u8 emlmr_mcs_map_count; 2064 u8 emlmr_mcs_map_bw[9]; 2065 }; 2066 2067 /** 2068 * struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg - NAN schedule configuration 2069 * @channels: array of NAN channels. A channel entry is in use if 2070 * channels[i].chanreq.oper.chan is not NULL. 2071 * @schedule: NAN local schedule - mapping of each 16TU time slot to 2072 * the NAN channel on which the radio will operate. NULL if unscheduled. 2073 * @avail_blob: NAN Availability attribute blob. 2074 * @avail_blob_len: length of the @avail_blob in bytes. 2075 * @deferred: indicates that the driver should notify peers before applying the 2076 * new NAN schedule, and apply the new schedule the second NAN Slot 2077 * boundary after it notified the peers, as defined in Wi-Fi Aware (TM) 4.0 2078 * specification, section 5.2.2. 2079 * The driver must call ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done() after the 2080 * schedule has been applied. 2081 * If a HW restart happened while a deferred schedule update was pending, 2082 * mac80211 will reconfigure the deferred schedule (and wait for the driver 2083 * to notify that the schedule has been applied). 2084 */ 2085 struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg { 2086 struct ieee80211_nan_channel channels[IEEE80211_NAN_MAX_CHANNELS]; 2087 struct ieee80211_nan_channel *schedule[CFG80211_NAN_SCHED_NUM_TIME_SLOTS]; 2088 u8 avail_blob[IEEE80211_NAN_AVAIL_BLOB_MAX_LEN]; 2089 u16 avail_blob_len; 2090 bool deferred; 2091 }; 2092 2093 /** 2094 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 2095 * @assoc: association status 2096 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 2097 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 2098 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 2099 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 2100 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 2101 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j. 2102 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 2103 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i. 2104 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1 2105 * Figure 9-1001k 2106 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 2107 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 2108 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 2109 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 2110 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 2111 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 2112 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 2113 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 2114 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 2115 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 2116 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 2117 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 2118 * your driver/device needs to do. 2119 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 2120 * (station mode only) 2121 * @nan_sched: NAN schedule parameters. &struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg 2122 */ 2123 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 2124 /* association related data */ 2125 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 2126 bool ibss_creator; 2127 bool ps; 2128 u16 aid; 2129 u16 eml_cap; 2130 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 2131 u16 mld_capa_op; 2132 2133 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 2134 int arp_addr_cnt; 2135 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 2136 size_t ssid_len; 2137 bool s1g; 2138 bool idle; 2139 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2140 /* Protected by the wiphy mutex */ 2141 struct ieee80211_nan_sched_cfg nan_sched; 2142 }; 2143 2144 #define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8 2145 2146 /** 2147 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info 2148 * 2149 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for 2150 * this TID is not included. 2151 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this 2152 * TID is not included. 2153 * @valid: info is valid or not. 2154 */ 2155 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm { 2156 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 2157 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 2158 bool valid; 2159 }; 2160 2161 /** 2162 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling 2163 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request 2164 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request 2165 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping 2166 */ 2167 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res { 2168 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT, 2169 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT, 2170 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED 2171 }; 2172 2173 /** 2174 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 2175 * 2176 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 2177 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 2178 * 2179 * @type: type of this virtual interface 2180 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 2181 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 2182 * or the BSS we're associated to 2183 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 2184 * indexed by link ID 2185 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 2186 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 2187 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 2188 * API calls meant for that purpose. 2189 * @dormant_links: subset of the valid links that are disabled/suspended 2190 * due to advertised or negotiated TTLM respectively. 2191 * 0 for non-MLO. 2192 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are 2193 * suspended due to negotiated TTLM, and could be activated in the 2194 * future by tearing down the TTLM negotiation. 2195 * 0 for non-MLO. 2196 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info. 2197 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm. 2198 * @addr: address of this interface 2199 * @addr_valid: indicates if the address is actively used. Set to false for 2200 * passive monitor interfaces, true in all other cases. 2201 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 2202 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 2203 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 2204 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 2205 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 2206 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 2207 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 2208 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 2209 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 2210 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 2211 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 2212 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 2213 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 2214 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 2215 * restrictions. 2216 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 2217 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 2218 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 2219 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 2220 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 2221 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 2222 * interface. 2223 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 2224 * for this interface. 2225 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2226 * sizeof(void \*). 2227 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 2228 * @txq_mgmt: the mgmt frame TX queue, currently only exists for NAN devices 2229 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 2230 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 2231 */ 2232 struct ieee80211_vif { 2233 enum nl80211_iftype type; 2234 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 2235 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 2236 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2237 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links; 2238 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm; 2239 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2240 bool addr_valid; 2241 bool p2p; 2242 2243 u8 cab_queue; 2244 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 2245 2246 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 2247 struct ieee80211_txq *txq_mgmt; 2248 2249 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2250 u32 driver_flags; 2251 u32 offload_flags; 2252 2253 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 2254 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 2255 #endif 2256 2257 bool probe_req_reg; 2258 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 2259 2260 /* must be last */ 2261 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2262 }; 2263 2264 /** 2265 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 2266 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 2267 * Return: the usable link bitmap 2268 */ 2269 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2270 { 2271 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 2272 } 2273 2274 /** 2275 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 2276 * @vif: the vif 2277 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 2278 */ 2279 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2280 { 2281 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 2282 return vif->valid_links != 0; 2283 } 2284 2285 /** 2286 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active 2287 * @vif: the vif 2288 * @link_id: the link ID to check 2289 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if 2290 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise. 2291 */ 2292 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 2293 unsigned int link_id) 2294 { 2295 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif)) 2296 return link_id == 0; 2297 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id); 2298 } 2299 2300 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 2301 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 2302 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2303 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2304 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 2305 2306 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2307 { 2308 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 2309 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 2310 #endif 2311 return false; 2312 } 2313 2314 /** 2315 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 2316 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 2317 * 2318 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2319 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 2320 * 2321 * Return: pointer to the wdev, or %NULL if the given wdev isn't 2322 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 2323 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 2324 */ 2325 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 2326 2327 /** 2328 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 2329 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 2330 * 2331 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2332 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 2333 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 2334 * 2335 * Return: pointer to the wdev 2336 */ 2337 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 2338 2339 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2340 { 2341 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 2342 } 2343 2344 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 2345 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2346 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2347 2348 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 2349 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2350 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2351 2352 /** 2353 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 2354 * 2355 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2356 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2357 * 2358 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2359 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2360 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2361 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2362 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2363 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2364 * generation in software. 2365 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2366 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2367 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2368 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2369 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2370 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2371 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2372 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2373 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2374 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2375 * MIC. 2376 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2377 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2378 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2379 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2380 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2381 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2382 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2383 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2384 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2385 * only for management frames (MFP). 2386 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2387 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2388 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2389 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2390 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2391 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2392 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2393 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2394 * for a AES_CMAC or a AES_GMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence 2395 * number generation only 2396 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key 2397 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag) 2398 */ 2399 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2400 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2401 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2402 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2403 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2404 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2405 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2406 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2407 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2408 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2409 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2410 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2411 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11), 2412 }; 2413 2414 /** 2415 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2416 * 2417 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2418 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2419 * 2420 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2421 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2422 * encrypted in hardware. 2423 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2424 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2425 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2426 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2427 * @keyidx: the key index (0-7) 2428 * @keylen: key material length 2429 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2430 * data block: 2431 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2432 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2433 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2434 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2435 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2436 * @link_id: the link ID, 0 for non-MLO, or -1 for pairwise keys 2437 */ 2438 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2439 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2440 u32 cipher; 2441 u8 icv_len; 2442 u8 iv_len; 2443 u8 hw_key_idx; 2444 s8 keyidx; 2445 u16 flags; 2446 s8 link_id; 2447 u8 keylen; 2448 u8 key[]; 2449 }; 2450 2451 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2452 2453 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2454 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2455 2456 /** 2457 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2458 * 2459 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2460 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2461 * reverse order than in packet) 2462 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2463 * reverse order than in packet) 2464 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2465 * reverse order than in packet) 2466 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2467 * reverse order than in packet) 2468 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2469 */ 2470 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2471 union { 2472 struct { 2473 u32 iv32; 2474 u16 iv16; 2475 } tkip; 2476 struct { 2477 u8 pn[6]; 2478 } ccmp; 2479 struct { 2480 u8 pn[6]; 2481 } aes_cmac; 2482 struct { 2483 u8 pn[6]; 2484 } aes_gmac; 2485 struct { 2486 u8 pn[6]; 2487 } gcmp; 2488 struct { 2489 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2490 u8 seq_len; 2491 } hw; 2492 }; 2493 }; 2494 2495 /** 2496 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2497 * 2498 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2499 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2500 * 2501 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2502 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2503 */ 2504 enum set_key_cmd { 2505 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2506 }; 2507 2508 /** 2509 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2510 * 2511 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2512 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2513 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2514 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2515 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2516 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2517 */ 2518 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2519 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2520 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2521 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2522 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2523 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2524 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2525 }; 2526 2527 /** 2528 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2529 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2530 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2531 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2532 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2533 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2534 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2535 * 2536 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2537 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2538 */ 2539 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2540 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2541 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2542 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2543 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2544 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2545 }; 2546 2547 #define IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_MAX IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320 2548 2549 /** 2550 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2551 * 2552 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2553 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2554 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2555 */ 2556 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2557 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2558 struct { 2559 s8 idx; 2560 u8 count; 2561 u8 count_cts; 2562 u8 count_rts; 2563 u16 flags; 2564 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2565 }; 2566 2567 /** 2568 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2569 * 2570 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2571 * 2572 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2573 * to the STA. 2574 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2575 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2576 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2577 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2578 * per peer TPC. 2579 */ 2580 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2581 s16 power; 2582 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2583 }; 2584 2585 /** 2586 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2587 * 2588 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2589 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2590 * 2591 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2592 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2593 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2594 * 2595 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2596 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2597 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2598 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2599 * 2600 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2601 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2602 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2603 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2604 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2605 */ 2606 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2607 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2608 2609 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2610 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2611 }; 2612 2613 /** 2614 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2615 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2616 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2617 * 2618 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2619 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2620 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2621 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2622 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2623 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2624 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2625 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2626 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2627 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2628 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2629 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2630 * @uhr_cap: UHR capabilities of this STA 2631 * @s1g_cap: S1G capabilities of this STA 2632 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2633 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with. 2634 * This is the minimum between the peer's capabilities and our own 2635 * operating channel width; Invalid for NAN since that is operating on 2636 * multiple channels. 2637 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2638 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2639 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2640 * the station moves to associated state. Invalid for NAN since it 2641 * operates on multiple configurations of rx_nss. 2642 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2643 * 2644 */ 2645 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2646 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2647 2648 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2649 u8 link_id; 2650 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2651 2652 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2653 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2654 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2655 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2656 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2657 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2658 struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap uhr_cap; 2659 struct ieee80211_sta_s1g_cap s1g_cap; 2660 2661 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2662 2663 u8 rx_nss; 2664 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2665 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2666 }; 2667 2668 /** 2669 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2670 * 2671 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2672 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2673 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2674 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2675 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2676 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2677 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2678 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2679 * 2680 * @addr: MAC address 2681 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2682 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2683 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2684 * Can be modified by driver. 2685 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2686 * otherwise always false) 2687 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2688 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2689 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2690 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2691 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2692 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2693 * @rates: rate control selection table 2694 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2695 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2696 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2697 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2698 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2699 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2700 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2701 * unlimited. 2702 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities of this MLO station 2703 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2704 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2705 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2706 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2707 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2708 * is used for non-data frames 2709 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2710 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2711 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2712 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2713 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2714 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2715 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2716 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2717 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2718 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2719 * by the AP. 2720 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2721 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not. 2722 * @epp_peer: indicates that the peer is an EPP peer. 2723 * @nmi: For NDI stations, pointer to the NMI station of the peer. 2724 * @nan_sched: NAN peer schedule for this station. Valid only for NMI stations. 2725 * @ext_mld_capa_ops: the MLD's extended MLD capabilities and operations 2726 * NOTE: currently only tracked for AP STAs 2727 */ 2728 struct ieee80211_sta { 2729 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2730 u16 aid; 2731 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2732 bool wme; 2733 u8 uapsd_queues; 2734 u8 max_sp; 2735 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2736 bool tdls; 2737 bool tdls_initiator; 2738 bool mfp; 2739 bool mlo; 2740 bool spp_amsdu; 2741 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2742 u16 eml_cap; 2743 2744 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2745 2746 bool support_p2p_ps; 2747 2748 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2749 2750 u16 valid_links; 2751 u16 ext_mld_capa_ops; 2752 bool epp_peer; 2753 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2754 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2755 2756 struct ieee80211_sta __rcu *nmi; 2757 2758 /* should only be accessed with the wiphy mutex held */ 2759 struct ieee80211_nan_peer_sched *nan_sched; 2760 2761 /* must be last */ 2762 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2763 }; 2764 2765 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2766 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2767 #else 2768 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2769 { 2770 return true; 2771 } 2772 #endif 2773 2774 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2775 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2776 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2777 2778 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2779 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2780 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2781 2782 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2783 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2784 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2785 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2786 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2787 2788 /** 2789 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2790 * 2791 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2792 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2793 * 2794 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2795 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2796 */ 2797 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2798 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2799 }; 2800 2801 /** 2802 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2803 * 2804 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2805 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2806 */ 2807 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2808 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2809 }; 2810 2811 /** 2812 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2813 * 2814 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2815 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2816 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2817 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2818 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2819 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2820 * 2821 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2822 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2823 */ 2824 struct ieee80211_txq { 2825 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2826 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2827 u8 tid; 2828 u8 ac; 2829 2830 /* must be last */ 2831 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2832 }; 2833 2834 /** 2835 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2836 * 2837 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2838 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2839 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2840 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2841 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2842 * 2843 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2844 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2845 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2846 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2847 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2848 * algorithm. 2849 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2850 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2851 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2852 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2853 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2854 * CCK frames. 2855 * 2856 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2857 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2858 * the FCS at the end. 2859 * 2860 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2861 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2862 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2863 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2864 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2865 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2866 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2867 * 2868 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2869 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2870 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2871 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2872 * 2873 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2874 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2875 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2876 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2877 * 2878 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2879 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2880 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2881 * 2882 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2883 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2884 * 2885 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2886 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2887 * 2888 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2889 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2890 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2891 * 2892 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2893 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2894 * 2895 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2896 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2897 * 2898 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2899 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2900 * the stack. 2901 * 2902 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2903 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2904 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2905 * 2906 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2907 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2908 * dtim_period). 2909 * 2910 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2911 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2912 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2913 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2914 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2915 * only in that case. 2916 * 2917 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2918 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2919 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2920 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2921 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2922 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2923 * 2924 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2925 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2926 * software. 2927 * 2928 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2929 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2930 * active interfaces. 2931 * 2932 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR: The driver would like to be informed 2933 * of any monitor interface, as well as their configured channel. 2934 * This is useful for supporting multiple monitor interfaces on different 2935 * channels. 2936 * 2937 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2938 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2939 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2940 * 2941 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2942 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2943 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2944 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2945 * supported cipher suites. 2946 * 2947 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2948 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2949 * for frames. 2950 * 2951 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2952 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2953 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2954 * control for more details. 2955 * 2956 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2957 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2958 * 2959 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2960 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2961 * is supported. 2962 * 2963 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2964 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2965 * 2966 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2967 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2968 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2969 * 2970 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2971 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2972 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2973 * CSA frame. 2974 * 2975 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2976 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2977 * 2978 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2979 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2980 * 2981 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2982 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2983 * 2984 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2985 * within A-MPDU. 2986 * 2987 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2988 * for sent beacons. 2989 * 2990 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2991 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2992 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2993 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2994 * Note that this doesn't apply for NAN, in which the peer's NMI address 2995 * can be equal to its NDI address. 2996 * 2997 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2998 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2999 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 3000 * timeout. 3001 * 3002 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 3003 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 3004 * 3005 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 3006 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 3007 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 3008 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 3009 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 3010 * 3011 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 3012 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 3013 * 3014 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 3015 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 3016 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 3017 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 3018 * 3019 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 3020 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 3021 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 3022 * 3023 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 3024 * TDLS links. 3025 * 3026 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 3027 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 3028 * 3029 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 3030 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 3031 * 3032 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 3033 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 3034 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 3035 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 3036 * See also the documentation for that flag. 3037 * 3038 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 3039 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 3040 * TXQs to start with. 3041 * 3042 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 3043 * length in tx status information 3044 * 3045 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 3046 * 3047 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 3048 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 3049 * 3050 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 3051 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 3052 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 3053 * 3054 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 3055 * offload 3056 * 3057 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 3058 * offload 3059 * 3060 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 3061 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 3062 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 3063 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 3064 * the stack. 3065 * 3066 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 3067 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 3068 * 3069 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 3070 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 3071 * 3072 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT 3073 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 3074 * 3075 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so 3076 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that 3077 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one 3078 * link is switching. 3079 * 3080 * @IEEE80211_HW_STRICT: strictly enforce certain things mandated by the spec 3081 * but otherwise ignored/worked around for interoperability. This is a 3082 * HW flag so drivers can opt in according to their own control, e.g. in 3083 * testing. 3084 * 3085 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_NDP_BLOCKACK: HW can transmit/receive S1G NDP 3086 * BlockAck frames. 3087 * 3088 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 3089 */ 3090 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 3091 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 3092 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 3093 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 3094 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 3095 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 3096 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 3097 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 3098 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 3099 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 3100 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 3101 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 3102 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 3103 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 3104 IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR, 3105 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 3106 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 3107 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 3108 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 3109 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 3110 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 3111 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 3112 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 3113 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 3114 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 3115 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 3116 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 3117 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 3118 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 3119 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 3120 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 3121 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 3122 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 3123 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 3124 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 3125 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 3126 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 3127 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 3128 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 3129 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 3130 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 3131 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 3132 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 3133 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 3134 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 3135 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 3136 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 3137 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 3138 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 3139 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 3140 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 3141 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 3142 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 3143 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 3144 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 3145 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING, 3146 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA, 3147 IEEE80211_HW_STRICT, 3148 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_NDP_BLOCKACK, 3149 3150 /* keep last, obviously */ 3151 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 3152 }; 3153 3154 /** 3155 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 3156 * 3157 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 3158 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 3159 * 3160 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 3161 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 3162 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 3163 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 3164 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 3165 * 3166 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 3167 * 3168 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 3169 * along with this structure. 3170 * 3171 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 3172 * 3173 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 3174 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 3175 * 3176 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 3177 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 3178 * 3179 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 3180 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 3181 * 3182 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 3183 * that HW supports 3184 * 3185 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 3186 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 3187 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 3188 * 3189 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 3190 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 3191 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 3192 * 3193 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3194 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 3195 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3196 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 3197 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3198 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 3199 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 3200 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 3201 * 3202 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 3203 * can handle. 3204 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 3205 * the hw can report back. 3206 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 3207 * 3208 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 3209 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 3210 * aggregation. 3211 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 3212 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 3213 * it shouldn't be set. 3214 * 3215 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 3216 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 3217 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 3218 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 3219 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 3220 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 3221 * 3222 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 3223 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 3224 * 3225 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 3226 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 3227 * 3228 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 3229 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 3230 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 3231 * adding _BW is supported today. 3232 * 3233 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 3234 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 3235 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 3236 * 3237 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 3238 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 3239 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 3240 * device_timestamp. 3241 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 3242 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 3243 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 3244 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 3245 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 3246 * 3247 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 3248 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 3249 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 3250 * 3251 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 3252 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 3253 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 3254 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 3255 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 3256 * neither enabled. 3257 * 3258 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 3259 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 3260 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 3261 * 3262 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 3263 * device. 3264 * 3265 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 3266 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 3267 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 3268 * 3269 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 3270 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 3271 * 3272 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 3273 * 3274 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 3275 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 3276 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 3277 * 3278 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 3279 */ 3280 struct ieee80211_hw { 3281 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 3282 struct wiphy *wiphy; 3283 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 3284 void *priv; 3285 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 3286 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 3287 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 3288 int vif_data_size; 3289 int sta_data_size; 3290 int chanctx_data_size; 3291 int txq_data_size; 3292 u16 queues; 3293 u16 max_listen_interval; 3294 s8 max_signal; 3295 u8 max_rates; 3296 u8 max_report_rates; 3297 u8 max_rate_tries; 3298 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 3299 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 3300 u8 max_tx_fragments; 3301 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 3302 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 3303 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 3304 struct { 3305 int units_pos; 3306 s16 accuracy; 3307 } radiotap_timestamp; 3308 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 3309 u8 uapsd_queues; 3310 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 3311 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 3312 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 3313 u8 weight_multiplier; 3314 u32 max_mtu; 3315 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 3316 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 3317 }; 3318 3319 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3320 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3321 { 3322 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3323 } 3324 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3325 3326 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3327 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3328 { 3329 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3330 } 3331 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3332 3333 /** 3334 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 3335 * 3336 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 3337 * @req: cfg80211 request. 3338 */ 3339 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 3340 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 3341 3342 /* Keep last */ 3343 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 3344 }; 3345 3346 /** 3347 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 3348 * 3349 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 3350 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 3351 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 3352 * @status: channel-switch response status 3353 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 3354 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3355 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3356 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 3357 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 3358 */ 3359 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 3360 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3361 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 3362 u8 action_code; 3363 u32 status; 3364 u32 timestamp; 3365 u16 switch_time; 3366 u16 switch_timeout; 3367 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 3368 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 3369 }; 3370 3371 /** 3372 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 3373 * 3374 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 3375 * 3376 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 3377 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 3378 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 3379 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 3380 * is already used internally by mac80211. 3381 * 3382 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 3383 */ 3384 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 3385 3386 /** 3387 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 3388 * 3389 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 3390 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 3391 */ 3392 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 3393 { 3394 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 3395 } 3396 3397 /** 3398 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 3399 * 3400 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3401 * @addr: the address to set 3402 */ 3403 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3404 { 3405 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3406 } 3407 3408 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3409 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3410 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3411 { 3412 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3413 return NULL; 3414 3415 if (c->band >= NUM_NL80211_BANDS) 3416 return NULL; 3417 3418 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3419 } 3420 3421 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3422 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3423 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3424 { 3425 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3426 return NULL; 3427 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3428 } 3429 3430 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3431 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3432 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3433 { 3434 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3435 return NULL; 3436 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3437 } 3438 3439 /** 3440 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3441 * @hw: the hardware 3442 * @skb: the skb 3443 * 3444 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3445 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3446 */ 3447 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3448 3449 /** 3450 * ieee80211_purge_tx_queue - purge TX skb queue 3451 * @hw: the hardware 3452 * @skbs: the skbs 3453 * 3454 * Free a set of transmit skbs. Use this function when device is going to stop 3455 * but some transmit skbs without TX status are still queued. 3456 * This function does not take the list lock and the caller must hold the 3457 * relevant locks to use it. 3458 */ 3459 void ieee80211_purge_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3460 struct sk_buff_head *skbs); 3461 3462 /** 3463 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3464 * 3465 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3466 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3467 * 3468 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3469 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3470 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3471 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3472 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3473 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3474 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3475 * 3476 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3477 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3478 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3479 * 3480 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3481 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3482 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3483 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3484 * 3485 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3486 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3487 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3488 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3489 * 3490 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3491 * 3492 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3493 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3494 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3495 * based on the receive flags. 3496 * 3497 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3498 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3499 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3500 * keys. 3501 * 3502 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3503 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3504 * handler. 3505 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3506 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3507 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3508 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3509 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3510 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3511 * 3512 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3513 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3514 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3515 * 3516 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3517 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3518 * requirements: 3519 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3520 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3521 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3522 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3523 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3524 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3525 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3526 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3527 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3528 */ 3529 3530 /** 3531 * DOC: Powersave support 3532 * 3533 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3534 * 3535 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3536 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3537 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3538 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3539 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3540 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3541 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3542 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3543 * 3544 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3545 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3546 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3547 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3548 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3549 * 3550 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3551 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3552 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3553 * 3554 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3555 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3556 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3557 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3558 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3559 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3560 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3561 * 3562 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3563 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3564 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3565 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3566 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3567 * periods. 3568 * 3569 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3570 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3571 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3572 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3573 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3574 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3575 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3576 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3577 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3578 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3579 * 3580 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3581 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3582 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3583 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3584 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3585 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3586 * 3587 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3588 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3589 */ 3590 3591 /** 3592 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3593 * 3594 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3595 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3596 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3597 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3598 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3599 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3600 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3601 * 3602 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3603 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3604 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3605 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3606 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3607 * 3608 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3609 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3610 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3611 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3612 * 3613 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3614 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3615 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3616 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3617 * 3618 * - a list of information element IDs 3619 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3620 * 3621 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3622 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3623 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3624 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3625 * vendor information elements. 3626 * 3627 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3628 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3629 * 3630 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3631 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3632 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3633 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3634 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3635 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3636 * 3637 * 3638 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3639 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3640 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3641 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3642 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3643 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3644 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3645 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3646 * 3647 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3648 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3649 * signal strength threshold checking. 3650 */ 3651 3652 /** 3653 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3654 * 3655 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3656 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3657 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3658 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3659 * 3660 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3661 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3662 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3663 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3664 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3665 * hardware flags. 3666 * 3667 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3668 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3669 * turned off otherwise. 3670 * 3671 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3672 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3673 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3674 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3675 */ 3676 3677 /** 3678 * DOC: Frame filtering 3679 * 3680 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3681 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3682 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3683 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3684 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3685 * 3686 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3687 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3688 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3689 * 3690 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3691 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3692 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3693 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3694 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3695 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3696 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3697 * 3698 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3699 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3700 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3701 * or dropped. 3702 * 3703 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3704 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3705 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3706 * the flag, but not clear it. 3707 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3708 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3709 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3710 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3711 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3712 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3713 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3714 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3715 */ 3716 3717 /** 3718 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3719 * 3720 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3721 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3722 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3723 * 3724 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3725 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3726 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3727 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3728 * the driver code. 3729 * 3730 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3731 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3732 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3733 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3734 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3735 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3736 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3737 * 3738 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3739 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3740 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3741 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3742 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3743 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3744 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3745 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3746 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3747 * @sta_notify callback. 3748 * 3749 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3750 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3751 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3752 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3753 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3754 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3755 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3756 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3757 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3758 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3759 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3760 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3761 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3762 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3763 * 3764 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3765 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3766 * 3767 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3768 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3769 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3770 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3771 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3772 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3773 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3774 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3775 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3776 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3777 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3778 * 3779 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3780 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3781 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3782 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3783 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3784 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3785 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3786 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3787 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3788 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3789 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3790 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3791 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3792 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3793 * 3794 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3795 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3796 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3797 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3798 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3799 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3800 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3801 * 3802 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3803 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3804 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3805 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3806 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3807 * 3808 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3809 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3810 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3811 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3812 */ 3813 3814 /** 3815 * DOC: HW queue control 3816 * 3817 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3818 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3819 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3820 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3821 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3822 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3823 * 3824 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3825 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3826 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3827 * 3828 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3829 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3830 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3831 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3832 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3833 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3834 * the hardware queue. 3835 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3836 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3837 * 3838 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3839 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3840 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3841 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3842 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3843 * 3844 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3845 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3846 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3847 * off-channel queue: 9 3848 * 3849 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3850 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3851 * 3852 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3853 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3854 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3855 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3856 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3857 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3858 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3859 * 3860 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3861 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3862 * 3863 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3864 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3865 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3866 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3867 */ 3868 3869 /** 3870 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3871 * 3872 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3873 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3874 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3875 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3876 * 3877 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3878 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3879 * multicast address. 3880 * 3881 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3882 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3883 * 3884 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3885 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3886 * 3887 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3888 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3889 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3890 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3891 * honour this flag if possible. 3892 * 3893 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3894 * station 3895 * 3896 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3897 * 3898 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3899 * 3900 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3901 * 3902 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3903 */ 3904 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3905 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3906 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3907 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3908 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3909 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3910 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3911 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3912 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3913 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3914 }; 3915 3916 /** 3917 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3918 * 3919 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3920 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3921 * 3922 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3923 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3924 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3925 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3926 * 3927 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3928 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3929 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3930 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3931 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3932 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3933 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3934 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3935 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3936 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3937 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3938 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3939 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3940 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3941 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3942 * session is gone and removes the station. 3943 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3944 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3945 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3946 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3947 */ 3948 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3949 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3950 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3951 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3952 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3953 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3954 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3955 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3956 }; 3957 3958 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3959 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3960 3961 /** 3962 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3963 * 3964 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3965 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3966 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3967 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3968 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3969 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3970 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3971 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3972 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3973 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3974 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3975 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3976 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3977 */ 3978 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3979 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3980 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3981 u16 tid; 3982 u16 ssn; 3983 u16 buf_size; 3984 bool amsdu; 3985 u16 timeout; 3986 }; 3987 3988 /** 3989 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3990 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3991 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3992 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3993 */ 3994 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3995 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3996 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3997 }; 3998 3999 /** 4000 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 4001 * 4002 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 4003 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 4004 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 4005 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 4006 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 4007 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 4008 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 4009 * the peer. 4010 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 4011 * by the peer 4012 */ 4013 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 4014 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 4015 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 4016 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 4017 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 4018 }; 4019 4020 /** 4021 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 4022 * 4023 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 4024 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 4025 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 4026 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 4027 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 4028 * 4029 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 4030 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 4031 * for sending management frames offchannel. 4032 */ 4033 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 4034 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 4035 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 4036 }; 4037 4038 /** 4039 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 4040 * 4041 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 4042 * reconfiguration type was completed. 4043 * 4044 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 4045 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 4046 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 4047 * of wowlan configuration) 4048 */ 4049 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 4050 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 4051 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 4052 }; 4053 4054 /** 4055 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 4056 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 4057 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 4058 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 4059 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 4060 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 4061 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 4062 * @was_assoc: set if this call is due to deauth/disassoc 4063 * while just having been associated 4064 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 4065 * 0 for a non-MLO connection. 4066 */ 4067 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 4068 u16 duration; 4069 u16 subtype; 4070 u8 success:1, was_assoc:1; 4071 int link_id; 4072 }; 4073 4074 /** 4075 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 4076 * 4077 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 4078 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 4079 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 4080 * 4081 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 4082 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 4083 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 4084 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 4085 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 4086 * Must be atomic. 4087 * 4088 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 4089 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 4090 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 4091 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 4092 * or zero. 4093 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 4094 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 4095 * is added. 4096 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4097 * 4098 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 4099 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 4100 * it must turn off frame reception.) 4101 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 4102 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 4103 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 4104 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4105 * 4106 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 4107 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 4108 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 4109 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 4110 * reconfigured at resume time. 4111 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 4112 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 4113 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 4114 * must return 1 from this function. 4115 * 4116 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 4117 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 4118 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 4119 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 4120 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 4121 * 4122 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 4123 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 4124 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 4125 * in suspend(). 4126 * 4127 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 4128 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 4129 * and @stop must be implemented. 4130 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 4131 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 4132 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 4133 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 4134 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 4135 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 4136 * 4137 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 4138 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 4139 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 4140 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 4141 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 4142 * 4143 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 4144 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 4145 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 4146 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 4147 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 4148 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 4149 * MAC address of the device going away. 4150 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 4151 * 4152 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 4153 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 4154 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 4155 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 4156 * 4157 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 4158 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 4159 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 4160 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 4161 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 4162 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 4163 * can sleep. 4164 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 4165 * are not implemented. 4166 * 4167 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 4168 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 4169 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 4170 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 4171 * The callback can sleep. 4172 * 4173 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 4174 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 4175 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 4176 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 4177 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 4178 * non-MLO connections. 4179 * The callback can sleep. 4180 * 4181 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 4182 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 4183 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 4184 * 4185 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 4186 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 4187 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 4188 * 4189 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 4190 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 4191 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 4192 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 4193 * which flags are changed. 4194 * This callback can sleep. 4195 * 4196 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 4197 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 4198 * 4199 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 4200 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 4201 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 4202 * is enabled. 4203 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 4204 * The callback can sleep. 4205 * 4206 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 4207 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 4208 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 4209 * The callback must be atomic. 4210 * 4211 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 4212 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 4213 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 4214 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 4215 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 4216 * 4217 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 4218 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 4219 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 4220 * 4221 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 4222 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 4223 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 4224 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 4225 * that power save is disabled. 4226 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 4227 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 4228 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 4229 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 4230 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 4231 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 4232 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 4233 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 4234 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 4235 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 4236 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 4237 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 4238 * The callback can sleep. 4239 * 4240 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 4241 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 4242 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 4243 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 4244 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 4245 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 4246 * The callback can sleep. 4247 * 4248 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 4249 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 4250 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 4251 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 4252 * 4253 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 4254 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 4255 * 4256 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 4257 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 4258 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 4259 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 4260 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 4261 * 4262 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 4263 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 4264 * this notification. 4265 * The callback can sleep. 4266 * 4267 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 4268 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 4269 * The callback can sleep. 4270 * 4271 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 4272 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 4273 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 4274 * The callback must be atomic. 4275 * 4276 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 4277 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 4278 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 4279 * should be set as well. 4280 * The callback can sleep. 4281 * 4282 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 4283 * The callback can sleep. 4284 * 4285 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 4286 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 4287 * 4288 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 4289 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 4290 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 4291 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 4292 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4293 * This callback can sleep. 4294 * 4295 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 4296 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 4297 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4298 * 4299 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4300 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 4301 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4302 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 4303 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4304 * 4305 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4306 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 4307 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4308 * callback can sleep. 4309 * 4310 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4311 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 4312 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4313 * callback can sleep. 4314 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 4315 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4316 * 4317 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 4318 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 4319 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 4320 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 4321 * 4322 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 4323 * power for the station. 4324 * This callback can sleep. 4325 * 4326 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 4327 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 4328 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 4329 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 4330 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 4331 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 4332 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 4333 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4334 * The callback can sleep. 4335 * 4336 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 4337 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 4338 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 4339 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 4340 * in @sta_state. 4341 * The callback can sleep. 4342 * 4343 * @link_sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can 4344 * be used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 4345 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 4346 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 4347 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 4348 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 4349 * Must be atomic. 4350 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 4351 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 4352 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 4353 * 4354 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 4355 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 4356 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 4357 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 4358 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 4359 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4360 * The callback can sleep. 4361 * 4362 * @link_sta_statistics: Get link statistics for this station. For example with 4363 * beacon filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be 4364 * accurate, so let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can 4365 * fill most of the values (indicating which by setting the filled 4366 * bitmap), but not all of them make sense - see the source for which 4367 * ones are possible. 4368 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4369 * The callback can sleep. 4370 * 4371 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 4372 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 4373 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 4374 * The callback can sleep. 4375 * 4376 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 4377 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 4378 * required function. 4379 * The callback can sleep. 4380 * 4381 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 4382 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 4383 * required function. 4384 * The callback can sleep. 4385 * 4386 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 4387 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 4388 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 4389 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 4390 * The callback can sleep. 4391 * 4392 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 4393 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 4394 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 4395 * TSF synchronization. 4396 * The callback can sleep. 4397 * 4398 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 4399 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 4400 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 4401 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 4402 * The callback can sleep. 4403 * 4404 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 4405 * 4406 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 4407 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 4408 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 4409 * The callback can sleep. 4410 * 4411 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 4412 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 4413 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 4414 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 4415 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 4416 * 4417 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 4418 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 4419 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 4420 * 4421 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 4422 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 4423 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 4424 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 4425 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 4426 * Note that vif can be NULL. 4427 * The callback can sleep. 4428 * 4429 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4430 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4431 * The callback can sleep. 4432 * 4433 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4434 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4435 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4436 * completion of the channel switch. 4437 * 4438 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4439 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4440 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4441 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4442 * 4443 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4444 * 4445 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4446 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4447 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4448 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4449 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4450 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4451 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4452 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4453 * must be accepted in this case. 4454 * This callback may sleep. 4455 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4456 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4457 * 4458 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4459 * 4460 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4461 * 4462 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4463 * queues before entering power save. 4464 * 4465 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4466 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4467 * The callback can sleep. 4468 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4469 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4470 * The callback must be atomic. 4471 * 4472 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4473 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4474 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4475 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4476 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4477 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4478 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4479 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4480 * more-data bit must always be set. 4481 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4482 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4483 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4484 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4485 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4486 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4487 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4488 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4489 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4490 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4491 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4492 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4493 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4494 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4495 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4496 * This callback must be atomic. 4497 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4498 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4499 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4500 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4501 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4502 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4503 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4504 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4505 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4506 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4507 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4508 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4509 * This callback must be atomic. 4510 * 4511 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4512 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4513 * expected to return a static value. 4514 * 4515 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4516 * 4517 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4518 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4519 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4520 * expected to return a static value. 4521 * 4522 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4523 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4524 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4525 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4526 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4527 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4528 * management frame prior to transmitting that frame to allow the driver 4529 * to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response and be 4530 * able to synchronize with the GO. 4531 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4532 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4533 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4534 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4535 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4536 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4537 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4538 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4539 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4540 * Note that this isn't always called for each mgd_prepare_tx() call, for 4541 * example for SAE the 'confirm' messages can be on the air in any order. 4542 * 4543 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4544 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4545 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4546 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4547 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4548 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4549 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4550 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4551 * 4552 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4553 * This callback may sleep. 4554 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4555 * This callback may sleep. 4556 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4557 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4558 * channel context with different settings 4559 * This callback may sleep. 4560 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4561 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4562 * This callback may sleep. 4563 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4564 * unbound from vif. 4565 * This callback may sleep. 4566 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4567 * another, as specified in the list of 4568 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4569 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4570 * This callback may sleep. 4571 * 4572 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4573 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4574 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4575 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4576 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4577 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4578 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4579 * 4580 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4581 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4582 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4583 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4584 * This callback may sleep. 4585 * 4586 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4587 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4588 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4589 * 4590 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4591 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4592 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4593 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4594 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4595 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4596 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4597 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4598 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4599 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4600 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4601 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4602 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4603 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4604 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4605 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4606 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4607 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4608 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the 4609 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4610 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4611 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4612 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4613 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4614 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4615 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4616 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4617 * 4618 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4619 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4620 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4621 * 4622 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4623 * and hardware limits. 4624 * 4625 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4626 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4627 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4628 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4629 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4630 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4631 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4632 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4633 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4634 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4635 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4636 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4637 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4638 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4639 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4640 * the function call. 4641 * 4642 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4643 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4644 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4645 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4646 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4647 * 4648 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4649 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4650 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4651 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4652 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4653 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4654 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4655 * changed parameters. 4656 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4657 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4658 * this call. 4659 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4660 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4661 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4662 * @nan_peer_sched_changed: Notifies the driver that the peer NAN schedule 4663 * has changed. The new schedule is available via sta->nan_sched. 4664 * Note that the channel_entry blob might not match the actual chandef 4665 * since the bandwidth of the chandef is the minimum of the local and peer 4666 * bandwidth. It is the driver responsibility to remove the peer schedule 4667 * when the NMI station is removed. 4668 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4669 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4670 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4671 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4672 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4673 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4674 * 4675 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4676 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4677 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4678 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4679 * This callback may sleep. 4680 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4681 * This callback may sleep. 4682 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4683 * 4-address mode 4684 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4685 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4686 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4687 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4688 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4689 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4690 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4691 * twt structure. 4692 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4693 * from the peer. 4694 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4695 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4696 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4697 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4698 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4699 * radar channel. 4700 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4701 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4702 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4703 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4704 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is 4705 * supported by the driver. 4706 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4707 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4708 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4709 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4710 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4711 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4712 * Note that removal of link should always succeed, so the return value 4713 * will be ignored in a removal only case. 4714 * This callback can sleep. 4715 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4716 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4717 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4718 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4719 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4720 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4721 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4722 * that. 4723 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4724 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4725 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4726 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4727 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine 4728 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not. 4729 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and 4730 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping. 4731 * @prep_add_interface: prepare for interface addition. This can be used by 4732 * drivers to prepare for the addition of a new interface, e.g., allocate 4733 * the needed resources etc. This callback doesn't guarantee that an 4734 * interface with the specified type would be added, and thus drivers that 4735 * implement this callback need to handle such cases. The type is the full 4736 * &enum nl80211_iftype. 4737 * @set_eml_op_mode: Configure eMLSR/eMLMR operation mode in the underlay 4738 * driver according to the parameter received in the EML Operating mode 4739 * notification frame. 4740 */ 4741 struct ieee80211_ops { 4742 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4743 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4744 struct sk_buff *skb); 4745 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4746 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool suspend); 4747 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4748 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4749 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4750 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4751 #endif 4752 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4753 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4754 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4755 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4756 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4757 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4759 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, u32 changed); 4760 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4762 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4763 u64 changed); 4764 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4765 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4766 u64 changed); 4767 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4768 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4769 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4770 u64 changed); 4771 4772 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4773 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4774 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4775 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4776 4777 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4778 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4779 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4780 unsigned int changed_flags, 4781 unsigned int *total_flags, 4782 u64 multicast); 4783 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4784 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4785 unsigned int filter_flags, 4786 unsigned int changed_flags); 4787 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4788 bool set); 4789 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4790 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4791 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4792 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4793 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4794 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4795 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4796 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4797 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4798 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4799 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4800 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4802 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4803 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4804 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4806 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4807 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4808 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4809 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4810 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4812 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4813 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4814 const u8 *mac_addr); 4815 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4816 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4817 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4818 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4819 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4820 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4821 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4822 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4823 u32 value); 4824 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4825 u32 value); 4826 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4827 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4828 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4829 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4830 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4831 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4832 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4833 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4834 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4835 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4836 struct dentry *dir); 4837 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4838 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4839 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4840 struct dentry *dir); 4841 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4842 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4843 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4844 struct dentry *dir); 4845 #endif 4846 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4847 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4848 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4849 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4850 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4851 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4852 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4853 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4854 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4855 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4856 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4857 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4858 void (*link_sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4860 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4861 u32 changed); 4862 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4863 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4864 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4865 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4866 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4867 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4868 struct station_info *sinfo); 4869 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4870 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4871 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4872 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4873 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4874 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4875 u64 tsf); 4876 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4877 s64 offset); 4878 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4879 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4880 void (*link_sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4881 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4882 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4883 struct link_station_info *link_sinfo); 4884 4885 /** 4886 * @ampdu_action: 4887 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4888 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4889 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4890 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4891 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4892 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4893 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4894 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4895 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4896 * 4897 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4898 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4899 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4900 * 4901 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4902 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4903 * 4904 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4905 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4906 * - ``TX: 81`` 4907 * 4908 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4909 * 4910 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4911 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4912 * if the session can start immediately. 4913 * 4914 * The callback can sleep. 4915 */ 4916 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4917 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4918 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4919 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4920 struct survey_info *survey); 4921 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4922 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4923 s16 coverage_class); 4924 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4925 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4926 void *data, int len); 4927 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4928 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4929 void *data, int len); 4930 #endif 4931 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4932 u32 queues, bool drop); 4933 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4934 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4935 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4936 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4937 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4938 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4939 u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4940 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int radio_idx, 4941 u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4942 4943 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4945 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4946 int duration, 4947 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4948 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4950 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4951 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4952 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4953 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4954 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4955 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4956 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4957 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4958 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4959 4960 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4961 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4962 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4963 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4964 bool more_data); 4965 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4966 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4967 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4968 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4969 bool more_data); 4970 4971 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4972 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4973 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4974 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4975 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4976 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4977 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4978 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4979 4980 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4981 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4982 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4983 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4984 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4985 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4986 4987 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4988 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4989 unsigned int link_id); 4990 4991 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4992 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4993 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4994 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4995 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4996 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4997 u32 changed); 4998 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4999 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5000 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 5001 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 5002 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5003 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5004 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 5005 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 5006 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5007 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 5008 int n_vifs, 5009 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 5010 5011 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5012 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 5013 5014 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 5015 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5016 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5017 struct inet6_dev *idev); 5018 #endif 5019 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5020 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5021 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 5022 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5023 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5024 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 5025 5026 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5027 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5028 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 5029 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5031 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 5032 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5034 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 5035 5036 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5037 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5038 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5039 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5040 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5041 unsigned int link_id, int *dbm); 5042 5043 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5044 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5045 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 5046 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 5047 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 5048 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5049 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5050 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5051 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5053 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 5054 5055 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5056 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 5057 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5058 5059 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5061 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 5062 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5064 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5065 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5066 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 5067 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5069 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 5070 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5072 u8 instance_id); 5073 int (*nan_peer_sched_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5074 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5075 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5076 struct sk_buff *head, 5077 struct sk_buff *skb); 5078 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5079 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5080 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 5081 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5082 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 5083 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5084 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 5085 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5086 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5087 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5088 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 5089 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5090 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5091 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 5092 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5093 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5094 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5095 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 5096 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5097 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 5098 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5099 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5100 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 5101 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5102 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5103 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 5104 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5105 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 5106 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5107 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 5108 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5109 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5110 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5111 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 5112 struct net_device_path *path); 5113 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5114 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5115 u16 active_links); 5116 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5117 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5118 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 5119 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 5120 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5122 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5123 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 5124 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5125 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5126 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 5127 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5128 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5129 struct net_device *dev, 5130 enum tc_setup_type type, 5131 void *type_data); 5132 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res 5133 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5134 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm); 5135 void (*prep_add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5136 enum nl80211_iftype type); 5137 int (*set_eml_op_mode)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5139 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5140 struct ieee80211_eml_params *eml_params); 5141 }; 5142 5143 /** 5144 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 5145 * 5146 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 5147 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 5148 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 5149 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 5150 * @priv_data_len. 5151 * 5152 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 5153 * @ops: callbacks for this device 5154 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 5155 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 5156 * 5157 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 5158 */ 5159 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 5160 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 5161 const char *requested_name); 5162 5163 /** 5164 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 5165 * 5166 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 5167 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 5168 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 5169 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 5170 * @priv_data_len. 5171 * 5172 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 5173 * @ops: callbacks for this device 5174 * 5175 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 5176 */ 5177 static inline 5178 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 5179 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 5180 { 5181 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 5182 } 5183 5184 /** 5185 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 5186 * 5187 * You must call this function before any other functions in 5188 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 5189 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 5190 * 5191 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5192 * 5193 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 5194 */ 5195 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5196 5197 /** 5198 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 5199 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 5200 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 5201 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 5202 */ 5203 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 5204 int throughput; 5205 int blink_time; 5206 }; 5207 5208 /** 5209 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 5210 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 5211 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 5212 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 5213 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 5214 */ 5215 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 5216 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 5217 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 5218 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 5219 }; 5220 5221 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5222 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5223 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5224 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5225 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5226 const char * 5227 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5228 unsigned int flags, 5229 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5230 unsigned int blink_table_len); 5231 #endif 5232 /** 5233 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 5234 * 5235 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5236 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5237 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5238 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5239 * 5240 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5241 * 5242 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5243 */ 5244 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5245 { 5246 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5247 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 5248 #else 5249 return NULL; 5250 #endif 5251 } 5252 5253 /** 5254 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 5255 * 5256 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5257 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5258 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5259 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5260 * 5261 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5262 * 5263 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5264 */ 5265 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5266 { 5267 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5268 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 5269 #else 5270 return NULL; 5271 #endif 5272 } 5273 5274 /** 5275 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 5276 * 5277 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5278 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5279 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5280 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5281 * 5282 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5283 * 5284 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5285 */ 5286 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5287 { 5288 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5289 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 5290 #else 5291 return NULL; 5292 #endif 5293 } 5294 5295 /** 5296 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 5297 * 5298 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5299 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5300 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5301 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5302 * 5303 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5304 * 5305 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5306 */ 5307 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5308 { 5309 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5310 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 5311 #else 5312 return NULL; 5313 #endif 5314 } 5315 5316 /** 5317 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 5318 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 5319 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 5320 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 5321 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 5322 * 5323 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 5324 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 5325 * 5326 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 5327 */ 5328 static inline const char * 5329 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 5330 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5331 unsigned int blink_table_len) 5332 { 5333 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5334 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 5335 blink_table_len); 5336 #else 5337 return NULL; 5338 #endif 5339 } 5340 5341 /** 5342 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 5343 * 5344 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 5345 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 5346 * 5347 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 5348 */ 5349 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5350 5351 /** 5352 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 5353 * 5354 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 5355 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 5356 * before calling this function. 5357 * 5358 * @hw: the hardware to free 5359 */ 5360 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5361 5362 /** 5363 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 5364 * 5365 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 5366 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 5367 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 5368 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 5369 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 5370 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 5371 * 5372 * @hw: the hardware to restart 5373 */ 5374 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5375 5376 /** 5377 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 5378 * 5379 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5380 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5381 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5382 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5383 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5384 * 5385 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5386 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5387 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5388 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5389 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5390 * 5391 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 5392 * 5393 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5394 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5395 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5396 * @list: the destination list 5397 */ 5398 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5399 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 5400 5401 /** 5402 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 5403 * 5404 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5405 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5406 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5407 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5408 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5409 * 5410 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5411 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5412 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5413 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5414 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5415 * 5416 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 5417 * 5418 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5419 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5420 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5421 * @napi: the NAPI context 5422 */ 5423 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5424 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 5425 5426 /** 5427 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 5428 * 5429 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5430 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5431 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5432 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5433 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5434 * 5435 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5436 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5437 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5438 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5439 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5440 * 5441 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5442 * 5443 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5444 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5445 */ 5446 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 5447 { 5448 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 5449 } 5450 5451 /** 5452 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 5453 * 5454 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 5455 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5456 * 5457 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 5458 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 5459 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5460 * 5461 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5462 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5463 */ 5464 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 5465 5466 /** 5467 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 5468 * 5469 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 5470 * (internally disables bottom halves). 5471 * 5472 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 5473 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5474 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5475 * 5476 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5477 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5478 */ 5479 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5480 struct sk_buff *skb) 5481 { 5482 local_bh_disable(); 5483 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5484 local_bh_enable(); 5485 } 5486 5487 /** 5488 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5489 * 5490 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5491 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5492 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5493 * 5494 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5495 * 5496 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5497 * each other. 5498 * 5499 * @sta: currently connected sta 5500 * @start: start or stop PS 5501 * 5502 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 5503 */ 5504 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5505 5506 /** 5507 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5508 * (in process context) 5509 * 5510 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5511 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5512 * applies. 5513 * 5514 * @sta: currently connected sta 5515 * @start: start or stop PS 5516 * 5517 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 5518 */ 5519 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5520 bool start) 5521 { 5522 int ret; 5523 5524 local_bh_disable(); 5525 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5526 local_bh_enable(); 5527 5528 return ret; 5529 } 5530 5531 /** 5532 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5533 * @sta: currently connected station 5534 * 5535 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5536 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5537 * connected station was received. 5538 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5539 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5540 * be serialized. 5541 */ 5542 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5543 5544 /** 5545 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5546 * @sta: currently connected station 5547 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5548 * 5549 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5550 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5551 * from a connected station was received. 5552 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5553 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5554 * serialized. 5555 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5556 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5557 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5558 * checks. 5559 */ 5560 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5561 5562 /* 5563 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5564 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5565 */ 5566 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5567 5568 /** 5569 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5570 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5571 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5572 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5573 * 5574 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5575 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5576 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5577 * 5578 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5579 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5580 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5581 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5582 * 5583 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5584 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5585 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5586 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5587 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5588 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5589 * 5590 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5591 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5592 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5593 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5594 * use this API. 5595 */ 5596 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5597 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5598 5599 /** 5600 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5601 * 5602 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5603 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5604 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5605 * 5606 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5607 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5608 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5609 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5610 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5611 */ 5612 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5613 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5614 struct sk_buff *skb, 5615 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5616 int max_rates); 5617 5618 /** 5619 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5620 * 5621 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5622 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5623 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5624 * 5625 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5626 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5627 * @info: tx status information 5628 */ 5629 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5630 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5631 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5632 5633 /** 5634 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5635 * 5636 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5637 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5638 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5639 * 5640 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5641 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5642 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5643 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5644 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5645 * 5646 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5647 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5648 */ 5649 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5650 struct sk_buff *skb); 5651 5652 /** 5653 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5654 * 5655 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5656 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5657 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5658 * 5659 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5660 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5661 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5662 * 5663 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5664 * @status: tx status information 5665 */ 5666 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5667 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5668 5669 /** 5670 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5671 * 5672 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5673 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5674 * specific skbs. 5675 * 5676 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5677 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5678 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5679 * 5680 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5681 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5682 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5683 * @info: tx status information 5684 */ 5685 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5686 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5687 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5688 { 5689 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5690 .sta = sta, 5691 .info = info, 5692 }; 5693 5694 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5695 } 5696 5697 /** 5698 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5699 * 5700 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5701 * 5702 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5703 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5704 * for a single hardware. 5705 * 5706 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5707 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5708 */ 5709 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5710 struct sk_buff *skb) 5711 { 5712 local_bh_disable(); 5713 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5714 local_bh_enable(); 5715 } 5716 5717 /** 5718 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5719 * 5720 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5721 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5722 * 5723 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5724 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5725 * 5726 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5727 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5728 */ 5729 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5730 struct sk_buff *skb); 5731 5732 /** 5733 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5734 * 5735 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5736 * connected STA. 5737 * 5738 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5739 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5740 */ 5741 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5742 5743 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5744 5745 /** 5746 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5747 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5748 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5749 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5750 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5751 * should be ignored. 5752 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5753 */ 5754 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5755 u16 tim_offset; 5756 u16 tim_length; 5757 5758 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5759 u16 mbssid_off; 5760 }; 5761 5762 /** 5763 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5764 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5765 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5766 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5767 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5768 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5769 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5770 * 5771 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5772 * obtain the beacon template. 5773 * 5774 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5775 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5776 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5777 * applicable, the CSA count. 5778 * 5779 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5780 * 5781 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5782 */ 5783 struct sk_buff * 5784 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5785 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5786 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5787 unsigned int link_id); 5788 5789 /** 5790 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5791 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5792 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5793 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5794 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5795 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5796 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5797 * 5798 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5799 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5800 * requested index. 5801 * 5802 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5803 */ 5804 struct sk_buff * 5805 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5806 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5807 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5808 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5809 5810 /** 5811 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5812 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5813 * 5814 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5815 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5816 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5817 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5818 */ 5819 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5820 u8 cnt; 5821 struct { 5822 struct sk_buff *skb; 5823 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5824 } bcn[]; 5825 }; 5826 5827 /** 5828 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5829 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5830 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5831 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5832 * 5833 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5834 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5835 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5836 * one multiple BSSID element. 5837 * 5838 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5839 * 5840 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5841 * %NULL on error. 5842 */ 5843 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5844 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5846 unsigned int link_id); 5847 5848 /** 5849 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5850 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5851 * 5852 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5853 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5854 */ 5855 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5856 5857 /** 5858 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5859 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5860 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5861 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5862 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5863 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5864 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5865 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5866 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5867 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5868 * 5869 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5870 * obtain the beacon frame. 5871 * 5872 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5873 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5874 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5875 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5876 * 5877 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5878 * 5879 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5880 */ 5881 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5883 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5884 unsigned int link_id); 5885 5886 /** 5887 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5888 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5889 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5890 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5891 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5892 * 5893 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5894 * 5895 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5896 */ 5897 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5899 unsigned int link_id) 5900 { 5901 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5902 } 5903 5904 /** 5905 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5906 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5907 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5908 * 5909 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5910 * This function is called implicitly when 5911 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5912 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5913 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5914 * 5915 * Return: new countdown value 5916 */ 5917 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5918 unsigned int link_id); 5919 5920 /** 5921 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5922 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5923 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5924 * 5925 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5926 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5927 * 5928 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5929 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5930 */ 5931 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5932 5933 /** 5934 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5935 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5936 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5937 * 5938 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5939 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5940 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5941 */ 5942 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id); 5943 5944 /** 5945 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5946 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5947 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5948 * 5949 * Return: %true if the countdown reached 1, %false otherwise 5950 */ 5951 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5952 unsigned int link_id); 5953 5954 /** 5955 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5956 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5957 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5958 * 5959 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5960 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5961 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5962 */ 5963 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 link_id); 5964 5965 /** 5966 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5967 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5968 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5969 * 5970 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5971 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5972 * 5973 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5974 * 5975 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5976 */ 5977 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5979 5980 /** 5981 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5982 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5983 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5984 * 5985 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5986 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5987 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5988 * 5989 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5990 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5991 * 5992 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5993 */ 5994 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5995 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5996 5997 /** 5998 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5999 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6000 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6001 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 6002 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 6003 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 6004 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 6005 * if at all possible 6006 * 6007 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 6008 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 6009 * BSSID and address is used. 6010 * 6011 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 6012 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 6013 * 6014 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 6015 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 6016 * 6017 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 6018 */ 6019 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6020 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6021 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 6022 6023 /** 6024 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6025 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6026 * @src_addr: source MAC address 6027 * @ssid: SSID buffer 6028 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 6029 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 6030 * 6031 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6032 * hardware. 6033 * 6034 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6035 */ 6036 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6037 const u8 *src_addr, 6038 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 6039 size_t tailroom); 6040 6041 /** 6042 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 6043 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6044 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6045 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 6046 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 6047 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6048 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 6049 * 6050 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 6051 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6052 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 6053 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 6054 */ 6055 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6056 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 6057 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 6058 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 6059 6060 /** 6061 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 6062 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6063 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6064 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 6065 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6066 * 6067 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 6068 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6069 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 6070 * 6071 * Return: The duration. 6072 */ 6073 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 6075 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 6076 6077 /** 6078 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 6079 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6080 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6081 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 6082 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 6083 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6084 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 6085 * 6086 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 6087 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6088 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 6089 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 6090 */ 6091 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6092 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6093 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 6094 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 6095 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 6096 6097 /** 6098 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 6099 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6100 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6101 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 6102 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6103 * 6104 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 6105 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 6106 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 6107 * 6108 * Return: The duration. 6109 */ 6110 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6111 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6112 size_t frame_len, 6113 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 6114 6115 /** 6116 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 6117 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6118 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6119 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 6120 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 6121 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 6122 * 6123 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 6124 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 6125 * 6126 * Return: The duration. 6127 */ 6128 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6129 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6130 enum nl80211_band band, 6131 size_t frame_len, 6132 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 6133 6134 /** 6135 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 6136 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6137 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6138 * 6139 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 6140 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 6141 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 6142 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 6143 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 6144 * 6145 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 6146 * frames are available. 6147 * 6148 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 6149 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 6150 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 6151 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 6152 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 6153 * use common code for all beacons. 6154 */ 6155 struct sk_buff * 6156 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6157 6158 /** 6159 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 6160 * 6161 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 6162 * 6163 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6164 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 6165 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6166 */ 6167 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6168 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 6169 6170 /** 6171 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 6172 * 6173 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 6174 * from the given packet. 6175 * 6176 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6177 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 6178 * with this P1K 6179 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6180 */ 6181 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6182 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 6183 { 6184 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 6185 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 6186 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 6187 6188 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 6189 } 6190 6191 /** 6192 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 6193 * 6194 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 6195 * and transmitter address. 6196 * 6197 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6198 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 6199 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 6200 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 6201 */ 6202 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6203 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 6204 6205 /** 6206 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 6207 * 6208 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 6209 * in the packet. 6210 * 6211 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6212 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 6213 * encrypted with this key 6214 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 6215 */ 6216 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6217 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 6218 6219 /** 6220 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 6221 * 6222 * @pos: start of crypto header 6223 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6224 * @pn: PN to add 6225 * 6226 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 6227 * the packet payload) 6228 * 6229 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 6230 * point to the crypto header) 6231 */ 6232 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 6233 6234 /** 6235 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 6236 * 6237 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6238 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 6239 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 6240 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 6241 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 6242 * 6243 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 6244 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 6245 * by the device and not by mac80211. 6246 * 6247 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6248 * can be done concurrently. 6249 */ 6250 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6251 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6252 6253 /** 6254 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 6255 * 6256 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6257 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 6258 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 6259 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 6260 * @seq: new sequence data 6261 * 6262 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 6263 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 6264 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 6265 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 6266 * 6267 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6268 * can be done concurrently. 6269 */ 6270 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6271 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6272 6273 /** 6274 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 6275 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 6276 * @idx: the keyidx of the key 6277 * @key_data: the key data 6278 * @key_len: the key data. Might be bigger than the actual key length, 6279 * but not smaller (for the driver convinence) 6280 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO 6281 * 6282 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 6283 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 6284 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 6285 * 6286 * Return: the newly allocated key structure, which will have 6287 * similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 6288 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 6289 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 6290 * 6291 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 6292 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 6293 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 6294 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 6295 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 6296 * of the reconfiguration. 6297 * 6298 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 6299 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 6300 * 6301 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 6302 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. 6303 */ 6304 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 6305 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6306 u8 idx, u8 *key_data, u8 key_len, 6307 int link_id); 6308 6309 /** 6310 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 6311 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 6312 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 6313 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 6314 * @gfp: allocation flags 6315 */ 6316 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 6317 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 6318 6319 /** 6320 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 6321 * 6322 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6323 * at the same time. 6324 * 6325 * @keyconf: the key in question 6326 */ 6327 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6328 6329 /** 6330 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 6331 * 6332 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6333 * at the same time. 6334 * 6335 * @keyconf: the key in question 6336 */ 6337 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6338 6339 /** 6340 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 6341 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6342 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6343 * 6344 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 6345 */ 6346 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6347 6348 /** 6349 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 6350 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6351 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6352 * 6353 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 6354 */ 6355 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6356 6357 /** 6358 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 6359 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6360 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6361 * 6362 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 6363 * 6364 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 6365 */ 6366 6367 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6368 6369 /** 6370 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 6371 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6372 * 6373 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 6374 */ 6375 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6376 6377 /** 6378 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 6379 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6380 * 6381 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 6382 */ 6383 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6384 6385 /** 6386 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 6387 * 6388 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 6389 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 6390 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 6391 * any context, including hardirq context. 6392 * 6393 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 6394 * @info: information about the completed scan 6395 */ 6396 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6397 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 6398 6399 /** 6400 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 6401 * 6402 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 6403 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 6404 * 6405 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6406 */ 6407 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6408 6409 /** 6410 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 6411 * 6412 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 6413 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 6414 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 6415 * while associating, for instance. 6416 * 6417 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6418 */ 6419 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6420 6421 /** 6422 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 6423 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 6424 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 6425 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 6426 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 6427 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6428 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 6429 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6430 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 6431 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 6432 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 6433 * for instance. 6434 */ 6435 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 6436 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 6437 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 6438 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 6439 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 6440 }; 6441 6442 /** 6443 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 6444 * 6445 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6446 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 6447 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 6448 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6449 * 6450 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6451 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6452 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6453 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6454 */ 6455 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6456 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6457 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6458 void *data); 6459 6460 /** 6461 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6462 * 6463 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6464 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6465 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6466 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6467 * be used. 6468 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6469 * 6470 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6471 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6472 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6473 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6474 */ 6475 static inline void 6476 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6477 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6479 void *data) 6480 { 6481 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6482 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6483 iterator, data); 6484 } 6485 6486 /** 6487 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6488 * 6489 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6490 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6491 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6492 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6493 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6494 * 6495 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6496 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6497 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6498 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6499 */ 6500 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6501 u32 iter_flags, 6502 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6503 u8 *mac, 6504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6505 void *data); 6506 6507 struct ieee80211_vif * 6508 __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6509 struct ieee80211_vif *prev, 6510 u32 iter_flags); 6511 6512 /** 6513 * for_each_interface - iterate interfaces under wiphy mutex 6514 * @vif: the iterator variable 6515 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6516 * @flags: the iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6517 */ 6518 #define for_each_interface(vif, hw, flags) \ 6519 for (vif = __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, NULL, flags); \ 6520 vif; \ 6521 vif = __ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, vif, flags)) 6522 6523 /** 6524 * for_each_active_interface - iterate active interfaces under wiphy mutex 6525 * @vif: the iterator variable 6526 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6527 */ 6528 #define for_each_active_interface(vif, hw) \ 6529 for_each_interface(vif, hw, IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE) 6530 6531 /** 6532 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6533 * 6534 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6535 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6536 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6537 * 6538 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6539 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6540 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6541 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6542 */ 6543 static inline void 6544 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6545 u32 iter_flags, 6546 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6547 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6548 void *data) 6549 { 6550 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 6551 6552 for_each_interface(vif, hw, iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE) 6553 iterator(data, vif->addr, vif); 6554 } 6555 6556 /** 6557 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6558 * 6559 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6560 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6561 * function for them. 6562 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6563 * 6564 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6565 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6566 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6567 */ 6568 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6569 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6570 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6571 void *data); 6572 6573 struct ieee80211_sta * 6574 __ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6575 struct ieee80211_sta *prev); 6576 6577 /** 6578 * for_each_station - iterate stations under wiphy mutex 6579 * @sta: the iterator variable 6580 * @hw: the HW to iterate for 6581 */ 6582 #define for_each_station(sta, hw) \ 6583 for (sta = __ieee80211_iterate_stations(hw, NULL); \ 6584 sta; \ 6585 sta = __ieee80211_iterate_stations(hw, sta)) 6586 6587 /** 6588 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx - iterate stations 6589 * 6590 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6591 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6592 * function for them. This version can only be used while holding the wiphy 6593 * mutex. 6594 * 6595 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6596 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6597 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6598 */ 6599 static inline void 6600 ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6601 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6602 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6603 void *data) 6604 { 6605 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 6606 6607 for_each_station(sta, hw) 6608 iterator(data, sta); 6609 } 6610 6611 /** 6612 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6613 * 6614 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6615 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6616 * 6617 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6618 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6619 */ 6620 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6621 6622 /** 6623 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6624 * 6625 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6626 * workqueue. 6627 * 6628 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6629 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6630 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6631 */ 6632 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6633 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6634 unsigned long delay); 6635 6636 /** 6637 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6638 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6639 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6640 * 6641 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6642 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6643 * mac80211. 6644 * 6645 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6646 */ 6647 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6648 u16 tid); 6649 6650 /** 6651 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6652 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6653 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6654 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6655 * 6656 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6657 * 6658 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6659 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6660 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6661 */ 6662 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6663 u16 timeout); 6664 6665 /** 6666 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6667 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6668 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6669 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6670 * 6671 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6672 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6673 * from any context. 6674 */ 6675 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6676 u16 tid); 6677 6678 /** 6679 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6680 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6681 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6682 * 6683 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6684 * 6685 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6686 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6687 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6688 */ 6689 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6690 6691 /** 6692 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6693 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6694 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6695 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6696 * 6697 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6698 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6699 * can be called from any context. 6700 */ 6701 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6702 u16 tid); 6703 6704 /** 6705 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6706 * 6707 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6708 * @addr: station's address 6709 * 6710 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6711 * 6712 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6713 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6714 */ 6715 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6716 const u8 *addr); 6717 6718 /** 6719 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6720 * 6721 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6722 * @addr: remote station's address 6723 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6724 * 6725 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6726 * 6727 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6728 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6729 * 6730 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6731 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6732 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6733 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6734 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6735 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6736 * is not reliable. 6737 * 6738 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6739 */ 6740 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6741 const u8 *addr, 6742 const u8 *localaddr); 6743 6744 /** 6745 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6746 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6747 * @addr: remote station's link address 6748 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6749 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6750 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6751 * 6752 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6753 * 6754 * Return: pointer to STA if found, otherwise %NULL. 6755 */ 6756 struct ieee80211_sta * 6757 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6758 const u8 *addr, 6759 const u8 *localaddr, 6760 unsigned int *link_id); 6761 6762 /** 6763 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6764 * @hw: the hardware 6765 * @pubsta: the station 6766 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6767 * 6768 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6769 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6770 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6771 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6772 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6773 * 6774 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6775 * manner. 6776 * 6777 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6778 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6779 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6780 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6781 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6782 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6783 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6784 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6785 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6786 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6787 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6788 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6789 * woke up while blocked or not. 6790 */ 6791 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6792 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6793 6794 /** 6795 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6796 * @pubsta: the station 6797 * 6798 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6799 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6800 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6801 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6802 * 6803 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6804 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6805 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6806 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6807 * 6808 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6809 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6810 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6811 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6812 */ 6813 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6814 6815 /** 6816 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6817 * @pubsta: the station 6818 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6819 * 6820 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6821 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6822 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6823 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6824 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6825 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6826 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6827 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6828 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6829 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6830 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6831 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6832 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6833 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6834 */ 6835 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6836 6837 /** 6838 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6839 * @pubsta: the station 6840 * 6841 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6842 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6843 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6844 * 6845 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6846 * there is no need to call this function. 6847 */ 6848 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6849 6850 /** 6851 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6852 * 6853 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6854 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6855 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6856 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6857 * 6858 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6859 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6860 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6861 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6862 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6863 * attempts. 6864 * 6865 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6866 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6867 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6868 * them to 0. 6869 * 6870 * @pubsta: the station 6871 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6872 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6873 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6874 */ 6875 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6876 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6877 6878 /** 6879 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6880 * 6881 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6882 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6883 * 6884 * Return: %true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6885 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return %false. 6886 */ 6887 bool 6888 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6889 6890 /** 6891 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6892 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6893 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6894 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6895 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6896 * 6897 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep. 6898 * 6899 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6900 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6901 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6902 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. 6903 * 6904 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6905 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6906 * set_key callback. 6907 */ 6908 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6909 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6910 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6911 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6912 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6913 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6914 void *data), 6915 void *iter_data); 6916 6917 /** 6918 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6919 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6920 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6921 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6922 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6923 * 6924 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6925 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6926 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6927 * in removal process will be skipped. 6928 * 6929 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6930 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6931 */ 6932 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6934 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6936 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6937 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6938 void *data), 6939 void *iter_data); 6940 6941 /** 6942 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6943 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6944 * @iter: iterator function 6945 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6946 * 6947 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6948 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6949 * places while calling into the driver. 6950 * 6951 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6952 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6953 * removed. 6954 * 6955 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6956 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6957 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6958 * or not. 6959 */ 6960 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6961 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6962 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6963 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6964 void *data), 6965 void *iter_data); 6966 6967 /** 6968 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx - iterate channel contexts 6969 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6970 * @iter: iterator function 6971 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6972 * 6973 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function can only be used while 6974 * holding the wiphy mutex. 6975 * 6976 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6977 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6978 * removed. 6979 * 6980 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6981 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6982 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6983 * or not. 6984 */ 6985 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_mtx( 6986 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6987 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6988 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6989 void *data), 6990 void *iter_data); 6991 6992 /** 6993 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6994 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6995 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6996 * 6997 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6998 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6999 * information. This function must only be called from within the 7000 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 7001 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 7002 * %NULL. 7003 * 7004 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 7005 */ 7006 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7007 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7008 7009 /** 7010 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 7011 * 7012 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7013 * 7014 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 7015 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 7016 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 7017 */ 7018 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7019 7020 /** 7021 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 7022 * 7023 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7024 * 7025 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 7026 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 7027 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 7028 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 7029 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 7030 * 7031 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 7032 * without connection recovery attempts. 7033 */ 7034 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7035 7036 /** 7037 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 7038 * 7039 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7040 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 7041 * 7042 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 7043 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 7044 */ 7045 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 7046 7047 /** 7048 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 7049 * 7050 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7051 * 7052 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 7053 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 7054 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 7055 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 7056 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 7057 * 7058 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 7059 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 7060 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 7061 * disconnect normally later. 7062 * 7063 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 7064 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 7065 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 7066 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 7067 */ 7068 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7069 7070 /** 7071 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 7072 * hardware restart 7073 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7074 * 7075 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 7076 * hardware restart. 7077 */ 7078 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7079 7080 /** 7081 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 7082 * rssi threshold triggered 7083 * 7084 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7085 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 7086 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 7087 * @gfp: context flags 7088 * 7089 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 7090 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 7091 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 7092 */ 7093 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7094 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 7095 s32 rssi_level, 7096 gfp_t gfp); 7097 7098 /** 7099 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 7100 * 7101 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7102 * @gfp: context flags 7103 */ 7104 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 7105 7106 /** 7107 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 7108 * 7109 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7110 * @chanctx_conf: Channel context on which radar is detected. Mandatory to 7111 * pass a valid pointer during MLO. For non-MLO %NULL can be passed 7112 */ 7113 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7114 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf); 7115 7116 /** 7117 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 7118 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7119 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 7120 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 7121 * false. 7122 * 7123 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 7124 * and wake up the suspended queues. 7125 */ 7126 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 7127 unsigned int link_id); 7128 7129 /** 7130 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 7131 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7132 * 7133 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 7134 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 7135 * a deauth frame in this case. 7136 */ 7137 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7138 7139 /** 7140 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 7141 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7142 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 7143 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 7144 * 7145 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 7146 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 7147 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 7148 */ 7149 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7150 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 7151 7152 /** 7153 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 7154 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7155 */ 7156 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7157 7158 /** 7159 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 7160 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7161 */ 7162 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7163 7164 /** 7165 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 7166 * 7167 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 7168 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 7169 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 7170 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 7171 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 7172 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 7173 * 7174 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7175 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 7176 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 7177 */ 7178 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 7179 const u8 *addr); 7180 7181 /** 7182 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 7183 * @pubsta: station struct 7184 * @tid: the session's TID 7185 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 7186 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 7187 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 7188 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 7189 * 7190 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 7191 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 7192 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 7193 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 7194 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 7195 */ 7196 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 7197 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 7198 u16 received_mpdus); 7199 7200 /** 7201 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 7202 * 7203 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 7204 * buffer. 7205 * 7206 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7207 * @ra: the peer's destination address 7208 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 7209 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 7210 */ 7211 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 7212 7213 /** 7214 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 7215 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7216 * @addr: station mac address 7217 * @tid: the rx tid 7218 */ 7219 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 7220 unsigned int tid); 7221 7222 /** 7223 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 7224 * 7225 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 7226 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 7227 * reordering. 7228 * 7229 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 7230 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 7231 * 7232 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7233 * @addr: station mac address 7234 * @tid: the rx tid 7235 */ 7236 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7237 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 7238 { 7239 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 7240 return; 7241 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 7242 } 7243 7244 /** 7245 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 7246 * 7247 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 7248 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 7249 * reordering. 7250 * 7251 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 7252 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 7253 * 7254 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7255 * @addr: station mac address 7256 * @tid: the rx tid 7257 */ 7258 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7259 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 7260 { 7261 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 7262 return; 7263 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 7264 } 7265 7266 /** 7267 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 7268 * 7269 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 7270 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 7271 * 7272 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 7273 * 7274 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 7275 * @addr: station mac address 7276 * @tid: the rx tid 7277 */ 7278 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7279 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 7280 7281 /* Rate control API */ 7282 7283 /** 7284 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 7285 * 7286 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 7287 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 7288 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 7289 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 7290 * to be filled in 7291 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 7292 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 7293 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 7294 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 7295 * RTS threshold 7296 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 7297 * if the selected rate supports it 7298 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 7299 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 7300 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 7301 */ 7302 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 7303 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 7304 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 7305 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 7306 struct sk_buff *skb; 7307 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 7308 bool rts, short_preamble; 7309 u32 rate_idx_mask; 7310 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 7311 bool bss; 7312 }; 7313 7314 /** 7315 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 7316 */ 7317 enum rate_control_capabilities { 7318 /** 7319 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 7320 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 7321 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 7322 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 7323 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 7324 */ 7325 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 7326 /** 7327 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 7328 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 7329 */ 7330 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 7331 }; 7332 7333 struct rate_control_ops { 7334 unsigned long capa; 7335 const char *name; 7336 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7337 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 7338 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 7339 void (*free)(void *priv); 7340 7341 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 7342 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7343 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7344 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 7345 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7346 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7347 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7348 u32 changed); 7349 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7350 void *priv_sta); 7351 7352 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 7353 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7354 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 7355 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7356 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7357 struct sk_buff *skb); 7358 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7359 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 7360 7361 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 7362 struct dentry *dir); 7363 7364 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 7365 }; 7366 7367 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7368 enum nl80211_band band, 7369 int index) 7370 { 7371 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 7372 } 7373 7374 static inline s8 7375 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7376 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7377 { 7378 int i; 7379 7380 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7381 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7382 return i; 7383 7384 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 7385 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7386 7387 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 7388 return 0; 7389 } 7390 7391 static inline 7392 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7393 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7394 { 7395 unsigned int i; 7396 7397 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7398 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7399 return true; 7400 return false; 7401 } 7402 7403 /** 7404 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 7405 * 7406 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 7407 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 7408 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 7409 * the most recent rate control module decision. 7410 * 7411 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7412 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 7413 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 7414 * 7415 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7416 */ 7417 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7418 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 7419 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 7420 7421 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7422 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7423 7424 static inline bool 7425 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7426 { 7427 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 7428 } 7429 7430 static inline bool 7431 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7432 { 7433 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7434 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7435 } 7436 7437 static inline bool 7438 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7439 { 7440 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7441 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7442 } 7443 7444 static inline bool 7445 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7446 { 7447 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 7448 } 7449 7450 static inline bool 7451 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7452 { 7453 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 7454 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 7455 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 7456 } 7457 7458 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7459 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 7460 { 7461 if (p2p) { 7462 switch (type) { 7463 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 7464 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 7465 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 7466 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 7467 default: 7468 break; 7469 } 7470 } 7471 return type; 7472 } 7473 7474 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7475 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7476 { 7477 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 7478 } 7479 7480 /** 7481 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 7482 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7483 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7484 * 7485 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 7486 */ 7487 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 7488 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7490 { 7491 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7492 } 7493 7494 /** 7495 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 7496 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 7497 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7498 * 7499 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 7500 */ 7501 static inline __le16 7502 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7503 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7504 { 7505 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7506 } 7507 7508 /** 7509 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return EHT capabilities for sband/vif 7510 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7511 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7512 * 7513 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 7514 */ 7515 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 7516 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7518 { 7519 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7520 } 7521 7522 /** 7523 * ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap_vif - return UHR capabilities for sband/vif 7524 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7525 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7526 * 7527 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap, or %NULL is none found 7528 */ 7529 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_uhr_cap * 7530 ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7531 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7532 { 7533 return ieee80211_get_uhr_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7534 } 7535 7536 /** 7537 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 7538 * 7539 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7540 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 7541 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 7542 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 7543 * 7544 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 7545 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 7546 * matching GroupId management frame. 7547 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 7548 */ 7549 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7550 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 7551 7552 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7553 int rssi_min_thold, 7554 int rssi_max_thold); 7555 7556 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7557 7558 /** 7559 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 7560 * 7561 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7562 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO 7563 * 7564 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 7565 * 7566 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 7567 * applicable. 7568 */ 7569 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int link_id); 7570 7571 /** 7572 * ieee80211_calculate_rx_timestamp - calculate timestamp in frame 7573 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7574 * @status: RX status 7575 * @mpdu_len: total MPDU length (including FCS) 7576 * @mpdu_offset: offset into MPDU to calculate timestamp at 7577 * 7578 * This function calculates the RX timestamp at the given MPDU offset, taking 7579 * into account what the RX timestamp was. An offset of 0 will just normalize 7580 * the timestamp to TSF at beginning of MPDU reception. 7581 * 7582 * Returns: the calculated timestamp 7583 */ 7584 u64 ieee80211_calculate_rx_timestamp(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7585 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7586 unsigned int mpdu_len, 7587 unsigned int mpdu_offset); 7588 7589 /** 7590 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7591 * @vif: virtual interface 7592 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7593 * @gfp: allocation flags 7594 * 7595 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7596 */ 7597 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7598 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7599 gfp_t gfp); 7600 7601 /** 7602 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7603 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7604 * @vif: virtual interface 7605 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7606 * @band: the band to transmit on 7607 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7608 * 7609 * Return: %true if the skb was prepared, %false otherwise. 7610 * On failure, the skb is freed by this function; callers must not 7611 * free it again. 7612 * 7613 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7614 */ 7615 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7617 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7618 7619 /** 7620 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7621 * of injected frames. 7622 * 7623 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7624 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7625 * of the skb before calling this function. 7626 * 7627 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7628 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7629 * 7630 * Return: %true if the radiotap header was parsed, %false otherwise 7631 */ 7632 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7633 struct net_device *dev); 7634 7635 /** 7636 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7637 * 7638 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7639 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7640 * 7641 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7642 * 7643 * private: 7644 * 7645 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7646 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7647 */ 7648 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7649 u32 next_tsf; 7650 bool has_next_tsf; 7651 7652 u8 absent; 7653 7654 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7655 struct { 7656 u32 start; 7657 u32 duration; 7658 u32 interval; 7659 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7660 }; 7661 7662 /** 7663 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7664 * 7665 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7666 * @data: NoA tracking data 7667 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7668 * 7669 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7670 */ 7671 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7672 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7673 7674 /** 7675 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7676 * 7677 * @data: NoA tracking data 7678 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7679 */ 7680 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7681 7682 /** 7683 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7684 * @vif: virtual interface 7685 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7686 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7687 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7688 * @gfp: allocation flags 7689 * 7690 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7691 */ 7692 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7693 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7694 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7695 7696 /** 7697 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7698 * 7699 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7700 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7701 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7702 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7703 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7704 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7705 * 7706 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7707 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7708 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7709 * 7710 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7711 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7712 * 7713 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7714 */ 7715 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7716 7717 /** 7718 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7719 * 7720 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7721 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7722 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7723 * 7724 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7725 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7726 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7727 * 7728 * @sta: the station 7729 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7730 */ 7731 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7732 7733 /** 7734 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7735 * 7736 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7737 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7738 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7739 * 7740 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7741 * 7742 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7743 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7744 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7745 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7746 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7747 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7748 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7749 * 7750 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7751 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7752 */ 7753 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7754 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7755 7756 /** 7757 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7758 * (in process context) 7759 * 7760 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7761 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7762 * 7763 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7764 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7765 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7766 * 7767 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7768 */ 7769 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7770 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7771 { 7772 struct sk_buff *skb; 7773 7774 local_bh_disable(); 7775 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7776 local_bh_enable(); 7777 7778 return skb; 7779 } 7780 7781 /** 7782 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7783 * 7784 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7785 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7786 * 7787 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7788 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7789 */ 7790 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7791 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7792 7793 /** 7794 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7795 * 7796 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7797 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7798 * 7799 * Return: the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7800 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7801 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7802 */ 7803 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7804 7805 /** 7806 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7807 * 7808 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7809 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7810 * 7811 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7812 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7813 */ 7814 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7815 7816 /* (deprecated) */ 7817 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7818 { 7819 } 7820 7821 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7822 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7823 7824 /** 7825 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7826 * 7827 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7828 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7829 * 7830 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7831 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7832 * 7833 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7834 * this TXQ internally. 7835 */ 7836 static inline void 7837 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7838 { 7839 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7840 } 7841 7842 /** 7843 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7844 * 7845 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7846 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7847 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7848 * 7849 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7850 * internally. 7851 */ 7852 static inline void 7853 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7854 bool force) 7855 { 7856 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7857 } 7858 7859 /** 7860 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7861 * 7862 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7863 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7864 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7865 * next_txq(). 7866 * 7867 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7868 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7869 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7870 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7871 * again. 7872 * 7873 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7874 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7875 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7876 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7877 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7878 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7879 * 7880 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7881 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7882 * 7883 * Return: %true if transmission is allowed, %false otherwise 7884 */ 7885 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7886 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7887 7888 /** 7889 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7890 * 7891 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7892 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7893 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7894 * 7895 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7896 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7897 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7898 */ 7899 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7900 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7901 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7902 7903 /** 7904 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7905 * 7906 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7907 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7908 * 7909 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7910 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7911 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7912 * @gfp: allocation flags 7913 */ 7914 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7915 u8 inst_id, 7916 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7917 gfp_t gfp); 7918 7919 /** 7920 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7921 * 7922 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7923 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7924 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7925 * 7926 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7927 * @match: match event information 7928 * @gfp: allocation flags 7929 */ 7930 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7931 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7932 gfp_t gfp); 7933 7934 /** 7935 * ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done - notify that NAN schedule update is done 7936 * 7937 * This function is called by the driver to notify mac80211 that the NAN 7938 * schedule update has been applied. 7939 * Must be called with wiphy mutex held. May sleep. 7940 * 7941 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7942 */ 7943 void ieee80211_nan_sched_update_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7944 7945 /** 7946 * ieee80211_nan_cluster_joined - notify about NAN cluster join. 7947 * 7948 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN cluster join. 7949 * 7950 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7951 * @cluster_id: the cluster ID that was joined 7952 * @new_cluster: true if this is a new cluster 7953 * @gfp: allocation flags 7954 */ 7955 void ieee80211_nan_cluster_joined(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7956 const u8 *cluster_id, bool new_cluster, 7957 gfp_t gfp); 7958 7959 /** 7960 * ieee80211_nan_try_evacuate - try to evacuate a NAN channel 7961 * 7962 * This function tries to evacuate a NAN channel that is using the given 7963 * channel context, to free up channel context resources. 7964 * 7965 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7966 * @conf: the channel context configuration to try to evacuate. If %NULL, 7967 * the NAN channel that has the fewest slots scheduled will be evacuated. 7968 * 7969 * Return: %true if a channel was evacuated, %false otherwise 7970 */ 7971 bool ieee80211_nan_try_evacuate(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7972 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *conf); 7973 7974 /** 7975 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7976 * 7977 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7978 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7979 * 7980 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7981 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7982 * information. 7983 * @len: frame length in bytes 7984 * 7985 * Return: the airtime estimate 7986 */ 7987 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7988 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7989 int len); 7990 7991 /** 7992 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7993 * 7994 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7995 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7996 * 7997 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7998 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7999 * @len: frame length in bytes 8000 * 8001 * Return: the airtime estimate 8002 */ 8003 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8004 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 8005 int len); 8006 /** 8007 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 8008 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 8009 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8010 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO. 8011 * 8012 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 8013 * 8014 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 8015 */ 8016 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8017 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8018 unsigned int link_id); 8019 8020 /** 8021 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 8022 * probe response template. 8023 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 8024 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8025 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO. 8026 * 8027 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 8028 * 8029 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 8030 */ 8031 struct sk_buff * 8032 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8034 unsigned int link_id); 8035 8036 /** 8037 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 8038 * collision. 8039 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 8040 * 8041 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 8042 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 8043 * aware of. 8044 */ 8045 void 8046 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8047 u64 color_bitmap, u8 link_id); 8048 8049 /** 8050 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 8051 * 8052 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 8053 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 8054 * 8055 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 8056 * 8057 * Return: %true if @skb is a data frame, %false otherwise 8058 */ 8059 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 8060 { 8061 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 8062 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 8063 8064 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 8065 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 8066 } 8067 8068 /** 8069 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 8070 * @vif: interface to set active links on 8071 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 8072 * 8073 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls 8074 * back into the driver. 8075 * 8076 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 8077 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 8078 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 8079 * 8080 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 8081 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 8082 * a sequence of calls like 8083 * 8084 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 8085 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 8086 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 8087 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 8088 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 8089 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 8090 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 8091 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 8092 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 8093 * 8094 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 8095 */ 8096 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 8097 8098 /** 8099 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 8100 * @vif: interface to set active links on 8101 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 8102 * 8103 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 8104 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 8105 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 8106 * completed after it returns. 8107 */ 8108 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 8109 u16 active_links); 8110 8111 /** 8112 * ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm - tear down a negotiated TTLM request 8113 * @vif: the interface on which the tear down request should be sent. 8114 * 8115 * This function can be used to tear down a previously accepted negotiated 8116 * TTLM request. 8117 */ 8118 void ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 8119 8120 /** 8121 * ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw - convert channel width to STA RX bandwidth 8122 * @width: the channel width value to convert 8123 * Return: the STA RX bandwidth value for the channel width 8124 */ 8125 static inline enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth 8126 ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw(enum nl80211_chan_width width) 8127 { 8128 switch (width) { 8129 default: 8130 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 8131 fallthrough; 8132 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT: 8133 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20: 8134 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20; 8135 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40: 8136 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40; 8137 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80: 8138 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80; 8139 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_160: 8140 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80P80: 8141 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160; 8142 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_320: 8143 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320; 8144 } 8145 } 8146 8147 /** 8148 * ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw - prepare for sending BW RX OMI 8149 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI is going to be sent to 8150 * @bw: the bandwidth requested 8151 * 8152 * When the driver decides to do RX OMI to change bandwidth with a STA 8153 * it calls this function to prepare, then sends the OMI, and finally 8154 * calls ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(). 8155 * 8156 * Note that the (link) STA rate control is updated accordingly as well, 8157 * but the chanctx might not be updated if there are other users. 8158 * If the intention is to reduce the listen bandwidth, the driver must 8159 * ensure there are no TDLS stations nor other uses of the chanctx. 8160 * 8161 * Also note that in order to sequence correctly, narrowing bandwidth 8162 * will only happen in ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(), whereas widening 8163 * again (e.g. going back to normal) will happen here. 8164 * 8165 * Note that we treat this symmetrically, so if the driver calls this 8166 * and tells the peer to only send with a lower bandwidth, we assume 8167 * that the driver also wants to only send at that lower bandwidth, to 8168 * allow narrowing of the chanctx request for this station/interface. 8169 * 8170 * Finally, the driver must ensure that if the function returned %true, 8171 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw() is also called, even for example in 8172 * case of HW restart. 8173 * 8174 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held, and will call back 8175 * into the driver, so ensure no driver locks are held. 8176 * 8177 * Return: %true if changes are going to be made, %false otherwise 8178 */ 8179 bool ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 8180 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bw); 8181 8182 /** 8183 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw - finalize BW RX OMI update 8184 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI was sent to 8185 * 8186 * See ieee80211_client_prepare_rx_omi_bw(). Context is the same here 8187 * as well. 8188 */ 8189 void ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta); 8190 8191 /* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */ 8192 int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8193 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 8194 void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8195 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 8196 void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8197 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 8198 u32 changed); 8199 int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 8200 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 8201 int n_vifs, 8202 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 8203 8204 /** 8205 * ieee80211_vif_nan_started - Return whether a NAN vif is started 8206 * @vif: the vif 8207 * Return: %true iff the vif is a NAN interface and NAN is started 8208 */ 8209 bool ieee80211_vif_nan_started(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 8210 8211 /** 8212 * ieee80211_encrypt_tx_skb - Encrypt the transmit skb 8213 * @skb: the skb 8214 * Return: 0 if success and non-zero on error 8215 */ 8216 int ieee80211_encrypt_tx_skb(struct sk_buff *skb); 8217 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 8218